2004 Buick Century Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · appears in this manual. Please keep this manual...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-5Safety Belts .............................................. 1-6Child Restraints ....................................... 1-28Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-49Restraint System Check ............................ 1-58

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10Windows ................................................. 2-15Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-18Mirrors .................................................... 2-31OnStar® System ...................................... 2-33Storage Areas ......................................... 2-34Sunroof .................................................. 2-36

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2Climate Controls ...................................... 3-18Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-27Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-44

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-31

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-4Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-49Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-51Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-56Tires ...................................................... 5-57Appearance Care ..................................... 5-88Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-96Electrical System ...................................... 5-97Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-103

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index ................................................................ 1

2004 Buick Century Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem and the name CENTURY areregistered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever itappears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will bethere if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If yousell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so thenew owner can use it.

Canadian OwnersYou can obtain a French copy of this manual from yourdealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. Ifyou do this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you will findthat pictures and words work together to explain things.

IndexA good place to look for what you need is the Index inback of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of whatis in the manual, and the page number where you willfind it.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 10334120 A First Edition

©Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/18/03All Rights Reserved

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you aboutthings that could hurt you if you were to ignore thewarning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, youor others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this” or “Don’t letthis happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice will tell you about something that can damageyour vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your warranty, and it could be costly.But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid thedamage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsYour vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,are shown along with the text describing the operationor information relating to a specific component, control,message, gage or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage or indicator, reference the followingtopics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Six-Way Power Seats .....................................1-3Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3Head Restraints .............................................1-5

Rear Seats .......................................................1-5Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-5

Safety Belts .....................................................1-6Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-10How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11Driver Position ..............................................1-12Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-19Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-20Center Passenger Position .............................1-20Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults .......................................1-25Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-27

Child Restraints .............................................1-28Older Children ..............................................1-28Infants and Young Children ............................1-30Child Restraint Systems .................................1-34Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-37

Top Strap ....................................................1-38Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-39Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-40Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System (Rear) ...............................1-42Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside

Seat Position ............................................1-42Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear

Seat Position ............................................1-44Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ............................................1-47Air Bag Systems ............................................1-49

Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-52When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-54What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-55How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-55What Will You See After an Air

Bag Inflates? ............................................1-56Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-58

Restraint System Check ..................................1-58Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-58Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-59

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the passenger’sseat to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar. Try to move the seat to besure it is locked into place.

1-2

Six-Way Power Seats

If the vehicle has a driver’sside power seat, thecontrol for it is located onthe outboard side ofthe seat cushion.

• To move the seat forward or rearward, push thecontrol forward or rearward.

• To raise or lower the entire seat, push the controlup or down.

• To raise or lower the front of the seat, push thefront of the control up or down.

• To raise or lower the rear of the seat, push the rearof the control up or down.

Reclining Seatbacks

Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat torelease the seatback, then move the seatback to thedesired position. Release the lever to lock the seatbackin place. Pull up on the lever without pushing on theseatback and the seatback will move forward.

1-3

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen you’re reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can’t do its job because itwon’t be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

1-4

Head Restraints

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatIf the vehicle has a split folding seat, you can gainaccess to the interior of the vehicle through the trunk.

To do this, pull forwardon the seat tab, locatedon the side of the rearseat, to move therear seatback down.

To return the seatback to its original position, push itback up, making sure the seat latch locks it in place.

1-5

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’twear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-30.

1-6

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seaton wheels.

1-7

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.

1-8

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-9

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts – not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required theuse of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas air bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

1-10

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident – even one that isn’t your fault – you andyour passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28or Infants and Young Children on page 1-30. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

1-11

Driver PositionThis part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear itproperly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-27.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-12

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-13

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on your shoulder. The belt should beaway from your face and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

To move it down, squeeze the release lever and theshoulder belt guide as shown and move the heightadjuster to the desired position. You can movethe adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder beltguide. After you move the adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without squeezing therelease lever to make sure it has locked into position.

1-14

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-15


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-16


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-17


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-18

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-19

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt — except for onething. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraint lockingfeature. If this happens, just let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Center Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someonecan sit in the center positions.

When you sit in the center seating position, you have alap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make thebelt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-20

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shownuntil the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-27.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if you ever had to.

1-21

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe positions next to the windows have lap-shoulderbelts. Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

1-22

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you canbuckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way andstart again. If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 1-27.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-23

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-24

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for small adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positionsthe belt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passenger positionin the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints andbooster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guidesmay be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how toinstall a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.

1-25

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt, and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

1-26

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-22.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turnthe guide and clip inward and in between the seatbackand the interior body, leaving only the loop of theelastic cord exposed.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill be just for you, and just for the seat in yourvehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wearit, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

1-27

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to awindow so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt andget the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-28

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on thechild’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that belts provide.If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Childrenand Small Adults on page 1-25. If the child isso small that the shoulder belt is still very close tothe child’s face or neck, you might want to placethe child in the center seat position, the onethat has only a lap belt.

1-29

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt in

CAUTION: (Continued)


this way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

1-30

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weighmuch -- until a crash. During a crash a babywill become so heavy it is not possible to holdit. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-31

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer outstanding protection for adults



and older children, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its air bag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight,height, and age but also whether or not therestraint will be compatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

1-32

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. This isnecessary because a newborn infant’s neck isweak and its head weighs so much comparedwith the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants always should be secured inappropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that’sunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-33

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-34

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Somebooster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, andsome high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

1-35

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has strapsthat come down over each of the infant’s shouldersand buckle together at the crotch. The five-pointharness system has two shoulder straps, two hipstraps and a crotch strap. A shield may takethe place of hip straps.

A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that areattached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shieldhas straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-likeshield that swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system orthe LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury. When securing an add-onchild restraint, refer to the instructions that come with therestraint which may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-36

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,therefore, recommend that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facinginfant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing childseat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in the front passengerseat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. Itis better to secure the child restraint in arear seat.

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center frontseat can be badly injured or killed by the rightfront passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Neversecure a child restraint in the center front seat.It is always better to secure a child restraint inthe rear seat.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the child restraint in arear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle – even when nochild is in it.

1-37

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” Itcan help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored tothe vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strap beinganchored. Others require the top strap always to beanchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint. If yours requires that the top strapbe anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchoredproperly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

1-38

Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in TopStrap Anchor Location on page 1-39. Be sure to usean anchor point located on the same side of the vehicleas the seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be readyto secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

Top Strap Anchor LocationThe vehicle has top strap anchors installed for the rearseating positions.

They are located under trim covers on the rear seatbackfiller panel.Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the rightfront passenger’s position because there is no placeto anchor the top strap.If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System)” following.

1-39

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)The vehicle has the LATCH system. You will findanchors (A) in all three rear seating positions.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead it uses vehicles anchors (A, B) and childrestraint attachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure atop tether strap (C).

1-40

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors for thischild restraint system,each seating position withthe LATCH system hasa label on the seatback ateach lower anchorposition.

The labels are located near the base of all three rearseating positions.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached toits anchorage points, the restraint won’t beable to protect the child correctly. In a crash,the child could be seriously injured or killed.Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint isproperly installed using the anchorage points,or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint. See “Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System” or “Securinga Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” inthe Index for information on how to secure achild restraint in your vehicle.

1-41

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System (Rear)

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seatingposition you want to use, where the bottom of theseatback meets the back of the seat cushion.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on thechild restraint to the LATCH anchorages in thevehicle. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-38.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the toptether from the top tether anchorage and thendisconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCHanchorages.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearOutside Seat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strapon page 1-38 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

1-42

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-43

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in aCenter Rear Seat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the latch system,see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strap onpage 1-38 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you’ll be using the lap belt to secure the child restraintin this position.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child restraint when andas the instructions say.

1-44

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center frontseat can be badly injured or killed by the rightfront passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Neversecure a child restraint in the center front seat.It is always better to secure a child restraint inthe rear seat.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the child restraint in arear seat.

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latchplate and pulling it along the belt.


3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around therestraint. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

1-45


5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you pushdown on the child restraint. If you’re using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

1-46

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strapon page 1-38 if the child restraint has one.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat, you will be using thelap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sureto follow the instructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passengerair bag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint.See “Seats” in the Index.


1-47

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.


5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-48

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. You may find it helpful to use your kneeto push down on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Air Bag SystemsThis part explains the frontal and side impact air bagsystems.

Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for thedriver and another frontal air bag for the right frontpassenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impactair bag for the driver.

If your vehicle has aside impact air bag forthe driver it will sayAIR BAG on the air bagcovering on the side of thedriver’s seatback closestto the door.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

1-49

Here are the most important things to know about theair bag systems:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you aren’t wearing your safety belt, even ifyou have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Air bags are designed to workwith safety belts but don’t replace them.

Frontal air bags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at allin rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,or in many side crashes. And, for someunrestrained occupants, frontal air bags mayprovide less protection in frontal crashesthan more forceful air bags have provided inthe past.



The side impact air bag for the driver isdesigned to inflate only in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the driver’s sideof your vehicle. It isn’t designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly, whether or not there’s an air bagfor that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,as you would be if you were leaning forward, itcould seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for air bag inflation beforeand during a crash.


1-50


Always wear your safety belt, even with frontalair bags. The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining control of thevehicle, and should not lean on the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bagsystem is designed for them.



Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see the part of thismanual called “Older Children” or “Infants andYoung Children.”

There is an air bagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-30for more information.

1-51

Where Are the Air Bags?

The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

1-52

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anair bag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t putanything between an occupant and an air bag,and don’t attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Don’t let seat covers block theinflation path of a side impact air bag.

1-53

When Should an Air Bag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact speed is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.”

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall thatdoes not move or deform, the threshold level isabout 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h). The threshold levelcan vary, however, with specific vehicle design, sothat it can be somewhat above or below this range.

If your vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will behigher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalair bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not help the occupant.

Your vehicle may or may not have a driver’s side impactair bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-49. A driver’sside impact air bag is designed to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes involving the driver’s door. A sideimpact air bag will inflate if the crash severity isabove the system’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Adriver’s side impact air bag is not designed to inflatein frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rearimpacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anair bag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of what the repaircosts were. For frontal air bags, inflation is determinedby the angle of the impact and how quickly thevehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts.For side impact air bags, inflation is determined bythe location and severity of the impact.

1-54

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth the frontal and side impact air bags, the sensingsystem triggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and relatedhardware are all part of the air bag modules. Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheeland instrument panel. For vehicles with a driver’s sideimpact air bag, the air bag modules are located inthe seatback closest to the driver’s door.

How Does an Air Bag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal air bags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the air bag. A side impact air bagwould not help you in many types of collisions, includingfrontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rearimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is nottoward that air bag. Air bags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts,and then only in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate tosevere side collisions for vehicles with a driver’sside impact air bag.

1-55

What Will You See After an Air BagInflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the air baginflated. Some components of the air bag module – thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, theside of the seatback closest to the door for the driver’sside impact air bag – will be hot for a short time.The parts of the bag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There willbe some smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated air bags. Air bag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan’t get out of the vehicle after an air baginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an air bag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

1-56

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger air bag.

• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After anair bag inflates, you will need some new parts foryour air bag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect youin another crash. A new system will include air bagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing anddiagnostic module, which records informationabout the frontal air bag system. The modulerecords information about the readiness of thesystem, when the system commands air baginflation and driver’s safety belt usage atdeployment. The module also records speed,engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealerfor service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s air bag, or the airbag covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag maynot work properly. You may have to replace theair bag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s air bag, or the air bagmodule and seatback for the driver’s side impact airbag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.

1-57

Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicleAir bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag systems in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer and the servicemanual have information about servicing your vehicleand the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anair bag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you are close toan air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-58

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCHsystem parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlierin this section.

1-59

✍ NOTES

1-60

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks ............................................2-10Door Locks ..................................................2-10Power Door Locks ........................................2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11Lockout Protection ........................................2-12Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-12Trunk ..........................................................2-13

Windows ........................................................2-15Power Windows ............................................2-16Sun Visors ...................................................2-17

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17PASS-Key® II ...............................................2-17

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18Ignition Positions ..........................................2-19Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21

Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-22Parking Brake ..............................................2-25Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-26Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-28Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29Engine Exhaust ............................................2-29Running Your Engine While You Are

Parked .....................................................2-30Mirrors ...........................................................2-31

Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-31Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-31Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-32Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-32

OnStar ® System .............................................2-33Storage Areas ................................................2-34

Glove Box ...................................................2-34Front Storage Area .......................................2-34Center Console Storage Area .........................2-35Convenience Net ..........................................2-35

Sunroof .........................................................2-36

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Thechildren or others could be badly injured oreven killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

The vehicle has two keys that are used for separatefunctions.

2-2

The ignition key is forthe ignition only.

The door key is forthe driver door andall other locks.

The keys have unique codes embedded in them tohelp prevent theft. See PASS-Key® II on page 2-17for more information.

Your dealer or Buick Roadside Assistance can providethe correct codes for the keys. Contact your dealeror see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5 formore information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If the vehicle has the OnStar® system with an activesubscription, and the keys were locked inside, acommand could be sent by the OnStar® system tounlock the vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-33for more information.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

2-4

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationThe remote keyless entry transmitter lets you lock andunlock the vehicle’s doors or release its trunk lidfrom about 3 feet (1 m) and up to 30 feet (9 m) away.

LOCK: Press the LOCKbutton to lock all the doors.

UNLOCK: Press the UNLOCK button to unlock thedriver door and turn on the interior lamps. See“Illumination on Remote Activation” later in this sectionfor more details. Press UNLOCK again to unlockthe passenger doors.

F (Trunk Release): To release the trunk lid, pressthis button. The trunk will only unlock if the transaxleis in PARK (P).

L (Remote Alarm): Press this button to activate analarm. The ignition must be in OFF or ACCESSORY forthe remote alarm to work. When the remote alarmbutton is pressed, the headlamps will flash, the horn willsound repeatedly, and the interior lamps will turn on.The alarms will turn off when one of the following occurs:

• The remote alarm button on the remote keylessentry transmitter is pressed a second time.

• The ignition is moved to RUN.

• The alarms have been on for about two minutes.

2-5

Security FeedbackThe remote keyless entry transmitter can beprogrammed so that when the LOCK or UNLOCKbutton is pressed, the vehicle gives visual or audiblefeedback confirmation. Each lock or unlock commandverification must be programmed individually. Theignition must be OFF for this feature to work.

Programming the LOCK CommandOne of four modes can be selected to confirm aLOCK command.

Mode 1 (One Chime): No Verification

Mode 2 (Two Chimes): Horn Chirp

Mode 3 (Three Chimes): Headlamps Flash

Mode 4 (Four Chimes): Horn Chirp andHeadlamps Flash

The vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3.The mode may have been changed since then.To determine the current lock mode mode, or to changethe lock mode, do the following:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Press and hold the power door lock switch inthe LOCK position.

3. While holding the power door lock switch in theLOCK position, press and release the remotekeyless entry transmitter LOCK button.A series of one to four chimes will sound,corresponding to the current lock mode.

4. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter LOCKbutton to advance to the next lock mode.If cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehicle willenter Mode 1.

5. To set a mode, release the power door LOCKswitch after the chime sequence of the desiredmode is heard.

Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year willnot affect the programmed mode.

Programming the UNLOCK CommandOne of four modes can be selected to confirm anUNLOCK command.

Mode 1 (One Chime): No Verification

Mode 2 (Two Chimes): Horn Chirp

Mode 3 (Three Chimes): Headlamps Flash

Mode 4 (Four Chimes): Horn Chirp andHeadlamps Flash

2-6

The vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3.The mode may have been changed since then.To determine the current unlock mode mode, or tochange the unlock mode, do the following:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Press and hold the power door lock switch inthe unlock position.

3. While holding the power door lock switch in theunlock position, press and release the remotekeyless entry transmitter UNLOCK button.A series of one to four chimes will sound,corresponding to the current unlock mode.

4. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter UNLOCKbutton to advance to the next unlock mode.If cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehicle willenter Mode 1.

5. To set a mode, release the power door unlockswitch after the chime sequence of the desiredmode is heard.


Delayed LockingThis feature can be turned on or off. It delays thelocking of the doors for five seconds after the powerdoor LOCK position or the LOCK button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed and the lastdoor is closed.

If a door is opened before five seconds, the delayedlock is cancelled. When all doors are closed again,delayed locking begins again.

Three chimes will sound to indicate that this feature ison. The chime will sound only when the key is not in theignition and a door is open.

To cancel delay locking, do any of the following:

• Press the unlock portion of the power doorlock switch.

• Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

• Press the LOCK portion of the power door lockswitch a second time.

• Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter a second time or.

• Insert the ignition key into the ignition.

2-7

Programming Delayed LockingDelayed locking has two modes.

Mode One (One Chime): Delayed locking is turned off.

Mode Two (Two Chimes): Delayed locking isturned on.

1. Close the doors.

2. Move the ignition key to the RUN position.

3. Apply the egular brakes.

4. Press and hold the power door unlock switch. Whileholding the power door unlock switch, move theshift lever out of and back into PARK (P).One or two chimes will sound indicating what modethe delayed locking is in.

5. Release the power door unlock switch,after one of the chime mode sequences,to set the desired mode

Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to one yearwill not affect the programmed mode.

Illumination on Remote ActivationThis feature provides interior lighting when a remotekeyless entry door unlock command is received by thevehicle. The ignition must be off for this feature towork. The interior lamps will stay on until either theignition is turned to RUN or until 40 seconds haselapsed. If a door is opened during this time, the timedlighting will be canceled, and the interior lamps willremain on. Also see “Entry Lighting” under InteriorLamps on page 3-15 for more information.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquely codedto prevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased through your dealer. Rememberto bring any additional transmitters with you so they alsocan be re-coded to match the new transmitter. Onceyour dealer has coded the new transmitter, the losttransmitter cannot unlock the vehicle. The vehicle canhave a maximum of four transmitters coded to it.

2-8

Battery ReplacementThe battery in the remote keyless entry transmittershould last about three years.

If the battery is weak the transmitter will not work withinits normal range. It is probably time to change thebattery if you have to be very close to the vehicle beforethe transmitter works.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery do the following:

1. Insert a flat object like a thin coin into the slot onthe back of the transmitter and pry apart the frontand back.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metalobject to do this. Make sure the new battery is atype CR2032 or equivalent, and that the positive (+)side of the battery is facing down.

3. Snap the front and back of the transmitter together.

4. Resynchronize and test the operation of thetransmitter with the vehicle.

ResynchronizationAfter the battery has been changed in the remotekeyless transmitter, it will need to be resynchronized. Todo this, press and hold both the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons until you hear one horn chirp.

2-9

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.

From the outside, use the door key or remote keylessentry transmitter. From the inside use the manualor power door locks.

To manually lock or unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, insert the key and turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise.

To lock or unlock the doors from the inside, push themanual lock lever forward or rearward.

2-10

Power Door Locks

The vehicle has frontpower door lock switches.Press the top portion ofa door lock switch tounlock or the bottomportion to lock all doors.

The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksProgrammable power door locks are intended to provideenhanced security and convenience by automaticallylocking and unlocking doors under certain conditions.The doors can be set to one of four operating modes.

Mode 1: Doors do not lock or unlock automatically whenthe transaxle is shifted out of or into PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when thetransaxle is shifted out of PARK (P), but do notunlock automatically when the transaxle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when the transaxleis shifted out of PARK (P) and automatically unlockwhen the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).

Mode 4: All doors automatically lock when the transaxleis shifted out of PARK (P) but only the driver’s doorautomatically unlocks when the transaxle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

2-11

The vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3.The mode may have been changed since then.To determine the current mode, or to change the mode,do the following:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Close all of the doors.

3. Apply the brakes.

4. Press and hold the power door lock switch in thelock position.

5. Move the shift lever out of and back into PARK (P)while holding the door lock switch in the LOCKposition.

6. Release the door lock switch to set thedesired mode.

After initially moving the shift lever out of and back intoPARK (P), each additional shift cycle will advancethe programming from the current mode to the nextoperating mode. If cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehiclewill enter operating Mode 1.


Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps to prevent a driver from locking thekeys inside of the vehicle by disabling the powerdoor locks when the following occurs:

• A door is opened.

• The key is left in the ignition.

• A power door lock is pressed.

The lockout protection feature can be overridden byholding the power door lock switch in the lock positionfor more than three seconds while the key is in theignition and any door is open.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will never belocked out of the vehicle. If the manual door lock is usedor if the key is left in the vehicle, but not in the ignition,you could still be locked out of the vehicle. Alwaysremember to take the keys with you.

Leaving Your VehicleBefore leaving the vehicle, take the keys, open thedoor, and set the locks from inside. Then get out andclose the door. See “Delayed Locking” in this section formore information.

2-12

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can not see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Climate ControlSystem in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.

Trunk LockTo unlock the trunk lid from the outside, insert the doorkey into the trunk lock and turn it counterclockwise.Or, with the vehicle in PARK (P), press the open trunksymbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Remote Trunk Release

Press the remote trunkrelease button locatedbehind the glove box doorto release the trunk lidfrom inside the vehicle.

The shift lever must be in PARK (P), but the key doesnot have to be in the ignition for the remote trunklid release button to work.

2-13

Trunk Assist Handle

Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-downor anchor point when securing items in the trunkmay damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only tohelp you close the trunk lid.

The vehicle may have anassist handle located onthe inside of the trunklid toward the driver’s sideof the vehicle.

Pull down on the handle to lower the trunk lid and closethe trunk. If the trunk is not properly closed, theDOOR/TRUNK ajar warning light will appear in themessage center of the instrument panel cluster. SeeDoor/Trunk Ajar Warning Light on page 3-42 formore information.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk may damage it. Use theemergency trunk release handle only to help youopen the trunk lid.

The vehicle has a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk on the latch. Thishandle will glow following exposure to light. Pull therelease handle to open the trunk from the inside.

2-14

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windowsclosed is dangerous. A child can be overcomeby the extreme heat and can suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke. Neverleave a child alone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-15

Power Windows

The switches on the driver’s door armrest are used tocontrol each of the windows when the ignition is inthe ON position. Each passenger door has itsown window switch.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the switchrearward and the driver’s window will open withoutstopping.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press forwardon the switch. To raise the window, press and holdthe switch forward.

Window Lock-OutThe driver’s window controls also include a lock-outswitch. Press LOCK on this control to preventpassengers from using their window switches. Thedriver can still control all the windows with the lock on.Press the other side of the window lock-out switchto allow passengers individual control of their windows.

2-16

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors. Theycan also be moved to the side windows. The sun visorsalso have extenders that can be pulled out for addedcoverage.

Visor Vanity MirrorOpen the cover on the sun visor to expose thevanity mirror.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsIf the vehicle has the lighted vanity mirrors, the lampscome on when the cover is opened.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.

PASS-Key ® II

The vehicle is equippedwith the PASS-Key® II(Personalized AutomotiveSecurity System)theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® II is a passivetheft-deterrent system.It works when the ignitionkey is inserted orremoved from the ignition.

PASS-Key® II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition keythat matches a decoder in the vehicle.

When the PASS-Key® II system senses that the wrongkey has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts downthe vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will notwork and fuel will not go to the engine for about threeminutes. If someone tries to start the vehicle again withthe wrong key, or uses another incorrect key duringthis time, the vehicle will not start. This discouragessomeone from randomly trying keys with differentresistor pellets in an attempt to make a match.

2-17

The ignition key must be clean and dry before it isinserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If theengine does not start and the SECURITY warninglight on the instrument panel is flashing, the key may bedirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.

Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and tryagain. If the vehicle still does not start, the ignitionkey may be faulty. Wait about three more minutes andtry a spare ignition key. At this time, you may alsowant to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 5-97 for information on fuse location. If thestarter will not work with the spare key, the vehicleneeds service. See your dealer or a locksmith who canservice the PASS-Key® II.

If a key is accidentally used that has a damaged ormissing resistor pellet, the starter will not work.The SECURITY warning light on the instrument panelwill then come on. But you do not have to wait threeminutes before trying another ignition key.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can service thePASS-Key® II to have a new key made.

If the SECURITY warning light comes on the instrumentpanel while the vehicle is being driven, the enginewill still be able to be started after it is turned off. ThePASS-Key® II system, however, is not working properlyand must be serviced by your dealer. The vehicle isnot protected by the PASS-Key® II system whenthis happens.

If a PASS-Key® II ignition key is lost or damaged,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® II to have a new key made. Also, seeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-5 for moreinformation.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or

slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-39 for more information.

2-18

Ignition PositionsWith the ignition key in the ignition, the key can beturned to five different positions:

A (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio andwindshield wipers operate when the engine is off.To use ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn itcounterclockwise. The steering wheel will stay locked.

B (LOCK): This is the only position in which the ignitionkey can be inserted or removed. This position locksthe ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It is atheft-deterrent feature.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and youcan not turn it, be sure you are using the correctkey; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn thesteering wheel left and right while you turn thekey hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using atool to force it could break the key or the ignitionswitch. If none of these works, then your vehicleneeds service.

C (OFF): In this position the engine is off but thesteering wheel is not locked and can still be turned.Use the OFF position if the vehicle must be pushedor towed.

D (RUN): This position is where the key returns to afterthe vehicle is started. This position displays some ofthe warning and indicator lights.

E. (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound when the driver’s door isopened if the ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORYand the key is in the ignition.

2-19

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)If the vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP), thepower windows and audio system can continue tooperate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key isturned to OFF and before any of the doors are opened.

Starting Your EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Theengine will not start in any other position – that is asafety feature. To restart the vehicle when it is alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as theengine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. Wait about15 seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If the engine will not start, or starts but then stops,it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Trypushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floorand holding it there as the key is held in STARTfor not more than 15 seconds at a time. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the engine

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.

2-20

Engine Coolant Heater

The vehicle may have this feature. In very cold weather,0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater canhelp. The vehicle will start easier and get betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, thecoolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of fourhours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is notrequired.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. Thecord is attached to the underside of the vehicle’sdiagonal brace, which is located above the engineair cleaner/filter assembly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Unplug and store the cord as it was before to keepit away from moving engine parts, before startingthe engine. If this is not done, the cord couldbe damaged.

2-21

How long should the coolant heater be kept plugged in?The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil used in the vehicle, and some otherthings. Instead of trying to list everything here, contactyour dealer in the area where the vehicle will be parking.The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.

Automatic Transaxle OperationThe shift lever for the automatic transmission is on thesteering column.

The ignition positions are displayed on the instrumentpanel cluster and will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.

Maximum engine speed is limited on the automatictransaxle when the vehicle is in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline components fromimproper operation.

There are several different positions for the shift lever.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-26. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-39.

2-22

PARK (P) : This position locks the vehicle’s frontwheels. It is the best position to use when the engine isstarted because the vehicle cannot move easily.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. The vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. The regular brakesmust be fully applied before shifting from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. If the vehicle cannotbe shifted out of PARK (P), increase pressure on theshift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P) whilekeeping the brake pedal pushed down. Then movethe shift lever out of PARK (P). See Shifting Outof Park (P) on page 2-28

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

To rock the vehicle back and forth in order to get it outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transaxle,see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snowon page 4-30.

NEUTRAL (N) : In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle isalready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not racing when shiftingyour vehicle.

2-23

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that itis moving slowly or not shifting gears as youincrease speed may damage the transaxle. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away. You can drive inSECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph(55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is fornormal driving. If more power is needed for passing,and the vehicle is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator pedal all the way down.

By doing this the vehicle will shift down to the next gearand have more power.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,but it offers more power and lower fuel economy thanAUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.

• When towing a trailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears.

• When going down a steep hill.

• When driving in no-highway scenarios such as citystreets.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting intoSECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) cancause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

SECOND (2): This position gives the vehicle morepower than THIRD (3) but lower fuel economythan THIRD (3). You can use SECOND (2) on hills.It can help control the speed going down steep mountainroads, but then you would also want to use yourbrakes off and on.

FIRST (1): This position gives the vehicle even morepower but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). It canbe used on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will notshift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-24

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake,hold the regular brakepedal down with your rightfoot. Push down theparking brake pedal withyour left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot. When you lift yourleft foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to thereleased position.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,the ignition is on and the shift lever is not in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N).

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-39. That section shows whatto do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-25

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-39.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake with your left foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

• Pull the shift lever toward you.

2-26

• Move the shift lever up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If the vehicle is left with the engine running, be sure it isin PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have moved the shift leverinto PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift lever out of PARK (P). Ifyou can, it means that the shift lever was not fully lockedinto PARK (P).

2-27

Torque LockIf parking the vehicle on a hill and the transaxle is notshifted into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehiclemay put too much force on the parking pawl in thetransaxle. It might be difficult to pull the shift lever out ofPARK (P). This is called torque lock. To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shift intoPARK (P) properly before leaving the driver’s seat. Tofind out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-26.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before releasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, another vehicle might have topush yours a little uphill. This takes some of thepressure off the parking pawl in the transaxle, enablingthe shift lever to be moved out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)The vehicle has an automatic transaxle shiftlock controlsystem which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) whenthe ignition is in the OFF position. The regular brakeshave to be fully applied before the vehicle can be shiftedfrom PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-22.

If the vehicle cannot be shifted out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way up into PARK (P) as brake applicationis maintained. Then move the shift lever into thedesired gear.

If the brake pedal is held down but still cannot beshifted out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. There is noshift interlock in this key position.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the desired gear.

5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.

2-28

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can not seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousness anddeath.You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-29

Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier Caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-29.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 4-26.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, alwaysset your parking brake and move the shiftlever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-26.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.

2-30

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly whensitting in a comfortable driving position.

To reduce glare from other vehicles’ headlamps, pull thelever at the bottom of the mirror, to the night position.To return the mirror to the day position, push the lever.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar ®

The vehicle may have a mirror with Onstar®. It has alever located at the bottom between the two lamps.To reduce glare from other vehicles’ headlamps, pull thelever to the night position. For the day position, pushthe lever to its original position.

There are two lamps located on the bottom of themirror. Press the button located next to each lampto turn it on or off.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-33 for moreinformation about the services OnStar® provides.

2-31

Outside Power Mirrors

The power mirror controlsare located on the driver’sdoor armrest.

To choose either the left or right outside mirror, movethe selector switch located above the control pad to theleft or the right. Then use the four-way arrows locatedon the control pad to move the mirrors in the desireddirection.

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of yourvehicle and the area behind your vehicle.

Outside Convex MirrorThe passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from thedriver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

2-32

OnStar ® System

OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in your vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

A completed Subscription Service Agreement is requiredprior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaidcalling minutes are also required for OnStar® PersonalCalling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms andconditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can befound at www.onstar.com.

OnStar ® ServicesOne of the following plans is normally included for aspecific duration with each vehicle equipped withOnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®

service plan to meet your needs.

Safe and Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock

• Remote Diagnostics

• Online Concierge

Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan services

• Route Support

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

2-33

Luxury and Leisure Plan• All Directions and Connections Plan services

• Personal Concierge

OnStar ® Personal CallingWith OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way tostay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wirelessphone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can placecalls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with nocontracts and no additional roaming charges. To find outmore about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to theOnStar® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or callOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorWith OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,entertainment and informative topics, such as trafficand weather reports. You are able to listen and reply toyour e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxUse the door key to lock and unlock the glove box.To open the glove box, lift the latch on its door.

Front Storage Area

To use the storage area, fold down the armrest locatedin the center front seat. Press the latch on the frontedge and pull up to access the storage area.

2-34

Center Console Storage AreaIf the vehicle has bucket seats it may have a centerconsole. The console has cupholders, and storage areasfor cassette tapes and compact discs.

To open the console’s rear storage area, press the latchlocated toward the front of the console and pull up.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net located on theback wall of the trunk.

Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It canhelp keep them from falling over.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store those inthe trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

2-35

SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroof. It includes a slidingglass panel and a sunshade.

The switch to open the sunroof is located overhead onthe headliner.

The switch works only when the ignition is on or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in Ignition Positionson page 2-19.

VENT: To raise the sunroof to the vent position, pushand hold the front of the switch until the sunroofglass stops. The sunshade must be opened by hand.To close the sunroof from the vent position, pushand hold the rear of the switch until the sunroofglass closes.

Open/Express Open: To open the sunroof, push therear of the switch once. The sunroof and sunshadewill open by themselves. To close the sunroof, push andhold the front of the switch until the sunroof motorstops. The sunshade must be closed by hand.

2-36

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4Horn .............................................................3-5Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12Interior Lamps ..............................................3-15Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-17

Climate Controls ............................................3-18Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-18Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-21Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-25Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-26

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-27Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-28Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-29Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-30Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-30Charging System Light ..................................3-31Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-32Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-33Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .........3-34Low Traction Light ........................................3-34

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-35Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-36Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-40Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-41Security Light ...............................................3-41Cruise Control Light ......................................3-42Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-42Door/Trunk Ajar Warning Light ........................3-42Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-42Fuel Gage ...................................................3-43Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-44

Audio System(s) .............................................3-44Setting the Time ...........................................3-45Radio with CD ..............................................3-45Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-53Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-62Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-62Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-63Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-63Care of Your CDs .........................................3-64Care of Your CD Player ................................3-64Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-64

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Instrument Panel Overview

3-2

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 3-12.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-28.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-4.

E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio SteeringWheel Controls on page 3-62.

F. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 2-22.

G. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25.

H. Side Window Defogger Outlet.I. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.J. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-5.K. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5.L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-44.M. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on

page 3-17.N. Climate Control. See Dual Climate Control System

on page 3-18.O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-34.P. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit

Breakers on page 5-97.

3-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flashers let you warn others to usecaution when approaching your vehicle. They alsolet police know you have a problem.

The hazard warningflasher button is located onthe top of the steeringcolumn.

Press the button to activate the front and rear turnsignals to flash on and off.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if it is not in the ignition.When the hazard warning flashers are on, theindividual turn signals will not operate.

Other Warning DevicesIf you store reflective, safety triangles in the vehicle, putone at the side of the road, about 300 feet (100 m)behind the vehicle to warn oncoming traffic of anemergency situation.

3-4

HornPress the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel enables the position of the steering wheel tobe adjusted.

The lever that lets the steering wheel tilt is located onthe outboard side of the steering column.

To tilt the steering wheel,hold it and pull the lever.Move the steering wheel toa comfortable drivingposition and release thelever to lock it into place.

Tilt the steering wheel to the highest position to givemore room when exiting and entering the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever located on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• Turn and Lane-Change Signals

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

• Flash-to-Pass

• Windshield Wipers• Windshield Washer

• Cruise Control

3-5

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever up or down. The leverreturns to its original position when the turn iscompleted.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever untilthe arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. The lever will return to its originalposition when released.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn orlane change, or that fail to work, may indicate aburned-out signal bulb or fuse. Other drivers will not seethe signal. See Front Turn Signal and Parking Lampson page 5-52 and Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps on page 5-54 for turn signal bulb replacementprocedures. Also see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-97 for location of fuses.

A chime will sound if the turn signal is left on for morethan 3/4 mile (1.2 km).

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beams to highbeams, or high to low, pull the multifunction lever until aclick is heard, then release it.

This indicator light onthe instrument panelcluster will come onwhile the high-beamlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps tosignal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.It works even if the headlamps are off. Pull the turnsignal lever toward you a little, but not so much that youhear a click.

If the headlamps are off or on low-beam, the high-beamheadlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long asyou hold the lever toward you. The high-beam indicatoron the instrument panel cluster will come on.

3-6

Windshield WipersTo operate the windshield wipers turn the band locatedon the multifunction lever upward or downward.

WIPER: Turn this band to control the windshield wipers.

OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off thewindshield wipers.

LO (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you toLO and past the delay settings for steady wiping atlow speed.

HI (High Speed): Turn the band away from you, to HI,and past the delay settings for steady wiping at ahigh speed.

(Delayed Wiping): Turn the band away from you, justpast OFF, to one of the five delayed settings, tochoose the length of intervals between each wiping

cycle. The further the band is turned upward, towardLO, the shorter the delay will be. Select one ofthese settings for light rain or snow.

MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle.Hold it until the windshield wipers start. Then let itgo. The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. Ifmore wipes are needed, hold the band on MIST longer.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the windshieldwiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become worn or damaged, get new blades orblade inserts. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacementon page 5-56.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuitbreaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear awaysnow or ice to prevent an overload.

3-7

Windshield Washer

J(Windshield Washer): At the top of themultifunction lever, there is a paddle with the wordPUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,push on the paddle. The wipers will run for severalsweeps and then either stop or return to the presetspeed. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

The LOW WASH light onthe instrument panelcluster will come on whenthe fluid level is low.

Cruise ControlIf the vehicle has cruise control, a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really helpon long trips. Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, the cruise controlshuts off.

{CAUTION:

• Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou can not drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

• Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeneedless wheel spinning, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

3-8

The cruise control will automatically disengage when theenhanced traction system begins to limit wheel spin.See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9.When road conditions allow, the cruise control can beused again.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Accelerate to the speed you want.

3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever andrelease it. The CRUISE light on the instrumentpanel cluster will come on.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

3-9

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course, shutsoff the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A(Resume/Accelerate) briefly. The vehicle will accelerateto the previous chosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Push in the SET button, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold itthere until you accelerate to the speed youwant, and then release the switch. To increase thespeed in very small amounts, move the switchto R/A briefly and then release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)faster.

The accelerate feature will only work after the cruisecontrol speed is set, by pushing the SET button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed whileusing cruise control:

• Push in the SET button until the vehicle slows downto the desired, then release it.

• To slow the vehicle down in very small amounts,push the SET button briefly. Each time this isdown, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

3-10

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed youset earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hills dependsupon the speed and load of the vehicle, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, youmay have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, you may haveto brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’sspeed down. Of course, applying the brake takesthe vehicle out of cruise control. Many drivers find thisto be too much trouble and do not use cruise control onsteep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Move the cruise switch to OFF.

Ending Speed MemoryWhen the cruise control or the ignition is turned off, orthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N),the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-11

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamps controlis located on the left sideof the instrument panel.

The exterior lamps control has three positions:

Off: Push the control all the way in to turn off all lamps.

Parking Lamps: Pull the control out, to the firstposition, to turn on the parking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

Headlamps: Pull the headlamp control to the secondposition, to turn on the headlamps together withthe previously listed lamps and lights.

A warning chime will sound if the driver’s door isopened when the ignition is turned to OFF, LOCK orACCESSORY and the headlamps are on.

3-12

Daytime Running Lamps/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Daytime runninglamps are required to function at all times on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes theDRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system will make the front turn signal lampscome on when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is off.

• The parking brake is released.

While the DRL are on, the front turn signal lamps alsowill be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarkerand other lamps will not be on. The instrument panelwill not be lit up either.

When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signallamps will turn off and the vehicle’s headlampsand parking lamps will turn on. The other lamps thatcome on with the headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will gooff and the front turn signal lamps will come on.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL and automaticheadlamp control off, set the parking brake while theignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start the vehicle. TheDRL, headlamps and parking lamps will stay off untilthe parking brake is released.

To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it isdark outside, move the exterior lamps control tothe parking lamp position. The parking lamps will remainilluminated and the headlamps will turn off.

As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

3-13

Delayed HeadlampsDelayed headlamp illumination provides a period ofexterior lighting as you leave the vehicle’s area.The feature is activated when the vehicle’s ignition isturned off and the headlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamp control feature described previouslyin this section. The headlamps will remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved from OFF to the parkinglamp position or until a 90 second lighting period hasended.

If the ignition is turned off while the exterior lampscontrol is in the parking lamp or headlamp position, thedelayed headlamp illumination cycle will not occur.

This feature can be turned on or off by doing thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Close all the doors.

3. Press and hold the LOCK position on the powerdoor lock switch. While holding the LOCK positionon the door lock switch, cycle the exterior lampscontrol on and off two times.

4. Release the power door LOCK switch. These stepsmust be carried out in a time period of less than10 seconds, followed by a delay period of no morethan 10 seconds.

5. Then, press and hold the unlock position on thepower door switch. While holding the unlockposition, turn the exterior lamps control on and offtwo times. Release the unlock position on the powerdoor switch. These operations must be carriedout in a time period of less than 10 seconds.

After releasing the unlock position on the power doorswitch, a single chime will be heard if the delayedheadlamp illumination function has been turned off.Two chimes will be heard if the feature has been turnedon. Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to ayear will not change the programmed operation for thisfeature.

3-14

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe instrument panel lights can be brightened ordimmed by turning the exterior lamps knob.

Turning the control all the way clockwise turns on thecourtesy lamps.

Courtesy LampsWhen any door is opened, several courtesy lamps comeon to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.These lamps can also be turned on by turning theexterior lamps control all the way clockwise to MAX.

Entry LightingThe courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a settime whenever you press UNLOCK on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

The lamps will stay on while a door is opened and thenturn off automatically about 25 seconds after it isclosed. If the UNLOCK button is pressed and a door isnot open, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off atthe end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim afterthe delay time and then turn off.

The courtesy lamps are canceled if the ignition key isturned to RUN or START and will not come on unless adoor is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting lights the vehicle’s interior for aperiod of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lightingto work. After all the doors have been closed, thedelayed entry lighting feature will continue to work untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in RUN.

• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceled and theinterior lamps will remain on.

3-15

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interior for a period of timeafter the ignition key is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.When the ignition key is removed, interior illuminationwill activate and remain on until one of the followingoccurs:

• The ignition is in RUN.

• The power door locks are activated.

• An illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceled and theinterior lamps will remain on.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the underside of therearview mirror. Press the button next to each lampto turn it on and off.

Dome LampThe dome lamp will come on when you open a door.

Battery Rundown ProtectionThis helps the vehicle’s battery from draining the batteryin case the interior courtesy lamps, reading lamps,visor vanity lamps, trunk lamp, underhood lamp or glovebox lamps are left on. If any of these lamps are lefton while the ignition is off, they will automatically turn offafter 20 minutes. The lamps will not come back onagain until you do one of the following:

• Turn the ignition on.

• Turn the exterior lamps control off, then on.

• Open a door.

If the vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on theodometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps afteronly three minutes.

3-16

Accessory Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets enable power electricalequipment such as a cellular telephone or a CB radioto be used inside the vehicle.

The vehicle is equipped with a 12-volt outlet. It islocated on the console, near the floor on thepassenger’s side. Open the cover to use the outlet. Besure to close the cover when the outlet is not in use.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatibleto the power accessory outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery.

Always turn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterThe center front ashtray is located below the instrumentpanel comfort controls.

To remove the ashtray, open the storage door. Thenopen the ashtray lid, lift up and pull it out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

Push the lighter to use it. When the heating element ishot, the lighter will pop back out by itself.

Notice: If you put papers or other flammable itemsin the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them and possibly damageyour vehicle. Never put flammable items in theashtray.

3-17

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemThe vehicle may have this climate control system.

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle canbe controlled with it.

Manual OperationTo change the current mode, select one of the followingsettings on the right knob.

MAX (Maximum Air-Conditioning): This moderecirculates much of the air inside the vehicle andsends it through the instrument panel outlets. Theair-conditioning compressor will run automaticallyin this setting unless the outside temperature is below40°F (4°C).

VENT (Ventilation): This mode brings in outside airand directs it through the instrument panel outlets.

BI-LEV (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.Some air may be directed toward the windshield.

HTR (Heater): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets, with some air directed to the outboardoutlets, for the side windows, and some air directed tothe windshield.

3-18

BLEND: This mode directs half of the air to go to thefloor outlets and half to the defroster and side windowoutlets. The air-conditioning compressor will runautomatically in this setting unless the outsidetemperature is below 40°F (4°C).

The right knob can also be used for the defrost mode.Information on defrosting and defogging can befound later in this section.

9FAN: The left knob controls the fan speed.

OFF: Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise toturn off the fan.

LO (Low Fan Speed): This setting creates the lowestfan speed.

HI (High Fan Speed): This setting creates the highestfan speed.

DRIVER (Driver’s Side Temperature): The lever onthe left adjusts the air temperature for the driver’sside outlets. Slide the lever up to raise the temperatureand down to lower the temperature.

PASSENGER (Passenger’s Side Temperature): Thelever on the right adjusts the air temperature for thepassenger’s side outlets. Slide the lever up to raise thetemperature and down to lower the temperature.

"(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn theair-conditioning on and off. An indicator light above thebutton will come on when the air conditioning is on.During daylight hours the interior lighting control mightneed adjustment to the highest setting in order forthe indicator light to be seen. The system will cool anddehumidify the air inside the vehicle when the A/Cindicator light is on.

On very hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot, inside air escape. This reduces the time for thevehicle to cool down.

For a quick cool-down on a very hot day, use MAX withthe temperature levers all the way in the blue area. Ifthis setting is used for long periods of time, the air in thevehicle may become too dry.

For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with thetemperature levers in the blue area. The systemwill bring in outside air and cool it.

On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upperbody, but your lower body may not be warm enough.Select BI-LEV and set the temperature levers to acomfortable setting. The system will bring in outside airand direct it to your upper body, while sending slightlywarmed air to your lower body. Push the A/C button forcooling.

3-19

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result of highhumidity causing moisture to form and condense onthe cool window glass. This can be minimized ifthe climate control system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from the windshieldand side windows. Use the blend mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove frost orfog from the windshield more quickly. For best results,clear all snow and ice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

0DEF (Defrost): This setting, located on the rightknob, directs most of the air through the defrosterand the side window outlets. Some of the air is directedto the floor and side window outlets. The air-conditioningcompressor will run automatically in this setting unlessthe outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

To defrost the window quickly, turn the mode knob tothe defrost setting and turn the driver’s and passenger’stemperature levers all the way to the red area.

To warm passengers while keeping the windows clear,use BLEND.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Rear Window Defogger

<(Rear): Press the button to turn the defogger on oroff. The rear window defogger will initially run forabout 15 minutes. If it is turned on again, the rearwindow defogger will only run for about seven and onehalf minutes before turning off.


Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

3-20

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemThe vehicle may have this climate control system.The heating, cooling and ventilation can be controlledwith it.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button forautomatic control of the inside temperature, the airdelivery mode and the fan speed. There might be adelay of two to three minutes before the fan comes onwhen the automatic operation is used in cold weather.For the automatic system to function, the temperaturemust be set between 61°F (16°C) and 89°F (31°C).

1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.

2. Press the AUTO button.Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat or coolany faster.If the system is set at the warmest temperaturesetting, 90°F (32°C), hot air will be directed to thefloor, the fan will increase to the highest speed, andthe system will remain in manual mode at thattemperature. The system will not return to automaticuntil the temperature setting is lowered.If the system is set at the coldest temperaturesetting, 60°F (15°C), cold interior air will berecirculated through the air panel outlets, and thefan will increase to the highest speed. Thesystem will not return to automatic until thetemperature is raised.

3-21

In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fanspeeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicleuntil warmer air is available. The system willstart out blowing air at the floor but may changemodes automatically as the vehicle warms upto maintain the chosen temperature setting. Thelength of time needed for warm up will depend onthe outside temperature and the length of timethat has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from10 to 30 minutes. Then, adjust the temperature, ifnecessary.Do not cover the solar sensor located in the centerof the instrument panel, near the windshield. Formore information on the solar sensor, see“Solar Sensor” later in this section.

Manual OperationDuring daylight hours, the instrument panel brightnesscontrol might need to be adjusted to the highest setting,in order to see the indicator lights for the variousclimate control settings.

OFF: Pressing the OFF button cancels automaticoperation and places the system in manual mode.Press the AUTO button to return to automatic operation.

TEMP (Temperature): To manually adjust thetemperature inside the vehicle, press the up arrow onthe TEMP control to raise the temperature and press thedown arrow to lower the temperature. The display willshow the selection for a few seconds, and then theoutside temperature will be displayed.

When the DUAL light indicator is on, this means theTEMP control has set the temperature for the driver.When the DUAL light indicator light is not on, this meansthe TEMP control has set the temperature for theentire cabin.

9 FAN: Press the up arrow on the FAN control toincrease fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fanspeed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automaticoperation and places the system in manual mode. Pressthe AUTO button to return to automatic operation. Ifthe airflow seems low when the fan is at the highestsetting, the passenger compartment air filter, ifequipped, may need to be replaced. For moreinformation see Passenger Compartment Air Filter onpage 3-26 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

AIR FLOW: This control has several settings tocontrol the direction of airflow when the system isnot in AUTO.

To access the various modes available, continue topress the AIR FLOW up or down arrows until the desiredmode, listed below, appears in the display.

3-22

WINDSHIELD/FLOOR: This setting directs some of theair to the floor outlets and some to the defroster andside window outlets. The air-conditioning compressor willrun automatically in this setting unless the outsidetemperature is below 40°F (4°C).

MID/FLOOR: This mode directs airflow through boththe floor and the instrument panel outlets. A smallamount of air is directed to the windshield and the sidewindow outlets.

MID (Instrument Panel): This mode directs air throughthe instrument panel outlets.

FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through theoutlets near the floor. The rest comes out of thedefroster and side window outlets.

VENT: Press this button to turn the air-conditioningcompressor on or off. The indicator light on the VENTmode is lit when the compressor is turned off. Theinterior brightness control might have to be adjusted tothe highest setting during the day in order to seethe indicator lamp.

VENT does not operate in the FRONT defrost mode.

RECIRC (Recirculation): Press this button to turn thismode on or off. RECIRC limits the amount of outsideair coming into the vehicle and recirculates most of theair inside your vehicle. It can be use to prevent

outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or toquickly heat or cool the air inside the vehicle. When thisbutton is pressed an indicator light will come on. Theinterior brightness control might have to be adjusted tothe highest setting during the day in order to see theindicator lamp.

This setting is not permitted in FRONT defrost modeand is only permitted in WINDSHIELD/FLOOR mode ifthe compressor is turned on.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot air insideescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, press the AUTObutton. The system will automatically enter therecirculation mode where the temperature will be at thefull cold position for maximum cooling.

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so a small amount of water dripping underneaththe vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turnedoff is normal.

Operating the climate control system in the RECIRCmode may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows whenthe weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, selecteither WINDSHIELD/FLOOR or defrost mode andincrease the speed.

3-23

SensorsThe solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar heatand the air inside of the vehicle. This information isused to maintain the selected temperature by regulatingadjustments to the temperature, the fan speed, andthe air delivery system. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. Therecirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary.Do not cover the solar sensor located in the centerof the instrument panel, near the windshield, orthe system will not work properly.

Passenger ControlThe arrow buttons to control the temperature on thepassenger side of the vehicle are located to the right ofthe PASSENGER CONTROL window. Press theDUAL button so that the indicator light is on. Press theright arrow to raise the temperature and press theleft arrow to lower the temperature on the passengerside of the vehicle.

• If the indicator light below the arrows is amber thisindicates that the passenger side temperature isset the same as the driver’s side.

• If the indicator light below the arrows is red, thisindicates that the passenger side temperature isset warmer than that of the driver’s side.

• If the indicator light below the arrows is blue thisindicates that the passenger side temperature isset cooler than that of the driver’s side.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the outside of the windows is a result of highhumidity causing moisture to form and condense on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. There are twomodes to clear fog or frost from the windshield andside windows. Use the WINDSHIELD/FLOOR mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly. For best results,clear all snow and ice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

1 FRONT (Defrost): This setting brings in outside airand directs most of the air through the defrost outlet.Some of the air also goes to the floor vents and the sidewindow outlets. The indicator light on the button willcome on and WINDSHIELD will be seen on the display.

To defrost the windows quickly, press the FRONTbutton, set the temperature to 90°F (32°C), select a highfan speed, and turn the DUAL button off.

3-24

To warm passengers while keeping the window clear,push the AIR FLOW button to selectWINDSHIELD/FLOOR which will appear on the display.Select a fan speed.

The air-conditioning compressor will run automatically inthis setting unless the outside temperature is below40°F (4°C).

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

= REAR: Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. It will initially turn off after about15 minutes. If it is turned on again, it will only run forabout seven and one half minutes before turning off.


Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

Outlet Adjustment

Move the control in thecenter of each air outlet toopen and close thelouvers, or adjust thedirection of the airflow.

3-25

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

• If the vehicle has a passenger compartment air filterand the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting it may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment AirFilter on page 3-26.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter is located inthe engine compartment below the air inlet grille, nearthe passenger’s side windshield wiper arm.

The filter traps most of the pollen from the air enteringthe air conditioning module. Like the engine’s air cleanerfilter, it may need to be changed periodically. Forinformation on how often to change the passengercompartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-4.

To change the passenger compartment air filter, use thefollowing steps:

1. Put the ignition in ACCESSORY and turn thewindshield wipers on.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF when the windshieldwipers are in the upright position.

3. Raise the hood.

4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose fromthe fender rail and air inlet grille.

5. Remove the hood weather-strip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle and peel it backhalfway to the center of the hood.

6. Remove the three air inlet grille retainers.

7. Remove the air inlet grille.

3-26

8. Replace the old airfilter by pulling up onits tab.

9. Install a new passenger compartment air filter. SeeNormal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-13 for the type of filter to use. Make sure itslides under the compartment retainers.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6.

Warning Lights, Gages andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on the vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could also save you orothers from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson when you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly – and even dangerous. So please get to knowthe warning lights and gages. They are a big help.

3-27

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let the driver know at a glance how the vehicle is running. it shows howfast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safelyand economically.

United States version with Enhanced Traction System and ABS shown; Canada Base Level similar

3-28

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).The odometer shows how far the vehicle has beendriven in either miles (used in the United States) or inkilometers (used in Canada).

The vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If ERRORis displayed, this indicates someone has probablytampered with it and the numbers may not be accurate.

You may wonder what happens if the vehicle needsa new odometer installed. If the new one can be set tothe mileage total of the old odometer, then that willbe done. But if it cannot, then it will be set at zero and alabel must be put on the driver’s door to show the oldmileage reading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer tells how far the vehicle has beendriven since it was last reset. To set the trip odometer tozero, press the button on the right side of the instrumentpanel cluster.

The trip/select reset button will go back and forthbetween the odometer and the trip odometer if thebutton is pressed and released within 1.5 seconds.

If the button is pressed and held for longer than1.5 seconds while in the trip odometer mode, it will bereset to zero. If the button is pressed and held for longerthan 1.5 seconds while in the odometer mode, it willhave no effect.

3-29

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindoccupants to fasten their safety belts.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.

Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the air bag symbol. The systemchecks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The system check includes the air bag modules, thewiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the air bag system, see Air BagSystems on page 1-49.

This light will come onwhen the vehicle isstarted, and it will flash fora few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the system isfunctioning properly.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after the vehicle isstarted, or comes on as the vehicle is being driven,there may be an electrical problem and the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

3-30

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the air bag systemmay not be working properly. The air bags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the air bagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Light

The charging system lightwill come on briefly whenthe ignition is turnedon, as a check to showthat it is working. Then itshould go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while the vehicle is beingdriven, there may be a problem with the chargingsystem. It could indicate that the vehicle has a looseaccessory belt or another electrical problem. Haveit checked right away. Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery.

If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with thelight on, be certain to turn off all the accessories,such as the radio and air conditioner.

3-31

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part is not working, the other part canstill work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when the ignition keyis turned to RUN. If it does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parking brake does notrelease fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means there is a brake problem.

If the light comes on while the vehicle is being driven,pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal maybe harder to push. or it may go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-31.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towed forservice.

United States Canada

3-32

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

If the vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light willcome on for a few seconds when the ignition key isturned to RUN. If the anti-lock brake system warninglight stays on longer than normal after the enginehas been started, turn the ignition off. Or, if the lightcomes on and stays on while the vehicle is being driven,stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to reset the system. If thelight still stays on, or comes on again while driving,the anti-lock brake system needs service. If the light ison and the regular brake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, but it does not haveanti-lock brakes.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will come onbriefly when the ignition key is turned to RUN. Thisis normal. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.


3-33

Enhanced Traction System WarningLight

If the vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem, (ETS) the warninglight may come on forthe following reasons:

• When the vehicle is shifted to SECOND (2) orFIRST (1). To turn the system back on, shiftto THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9.

• If the vehicle needs service. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

• When the parking brake is set with the enginerunning, and the parking brake does notrelease fully.After the parking brake is fully released and thetransaxle shift lever is in any position otherthan FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). This means thereis a problem with the system.

• If an engine-related problem affects the ETS andturns the system off.

When the ETS warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

Low Traction Light

If the vehicle has theEnhanced Traction System(ETS), this light willcome on when the systemis limiting wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this isnormal. Slippery road conditions may exist if thelow traction light comes on, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. The light will stay on for a few seconds afterthe ETS stops limiting wheel spin. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 4-9.

The low traction light also comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to RUN. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will function properly toindicate when the Enhanced Traction System is active.

3-34

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicates that theengine coolant hasoverheated or the radiatorcooling fan is notworking.

The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turnedon to show that it is working.

If the vehicle has been operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-25.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

The vehicle has a gagethat shows the enginecoolant temperature. If thegage pointer moves intothe red area, the engine istoo hot.

This reading indicates the same thing as the warninglight. It means that the engine coolant has overheated. Ifthe vehicle has been operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-25.

3-35

Tire Pressure Light

The vehicle may have atire pressure monitor thatindicates a large changein the pressure in one tire.

The system stores the tire pressures of the vehicle’sproperly inflated tires. The LOW TIRE light will come onif the pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi (83 kPa)lower than the other three tires. The LOW TIRE light willnot come on if the pressure in more than one tire islow, if the system is not yet calibrated, or if the vehicleis moving faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).

When the LOW TIRE light comes on, stop as soon aspossible and check all the tires for damage. If a tireis flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-74. Also checkthe tire pressure in all four tires as soon as possible.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.

The light will stay on, while the ignition is on, until thesystem is reset. See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 5-65.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Service Engine Soon Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON lightcomes on and a chime will sound to indicate that thereis a problem and service is required. Malfunctionsoften will be indicated by the system before any problemis apparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed to assistyour service technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.

3-36

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after a while, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of yourvehicle or the replacement of the original tires withother than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed.

• Avoiding hard accelerations.

• Avoiding steep uphill grades.

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

3-37

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

3-38

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICEENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-39

Oil Pressure Light

If the vehicle has a an oilproblem, this light maystay on after the engine isstarted, or come onwhile you are driving.

This light indicates that oil is not going through theengine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The enginecould be low on oil or could have some other oilproblem. Have it fixed right away.

The oil light could also come on in the followingsituations:

• The light will come on briefly when the ignition isturned on to show that it is working properly. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on, there may bea problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixedright away.

• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, thelight may blink on and off. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

3-40

Change Engine Oil Light

The CHANGE OIL SOONlight should come onbriefly as a bulb checkwhen the engine is started.If the light does notcome on, have it serviced.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on and stays onafter the engine is started, have the oil changed.

For additional information, see “When to Change EngineOil (GM Oil Life System)” under Engine Oil onpage 5-13. To reset the CHANGE OIL SOON light, see“How to Reset the System” under Engine Oil onpage 5-13.

Security Light

The SECURITY light willcome on when the key isturned to START, andwill stay on until thevehicle starts.

It will also flash if the ignition key is too dirty or wet forthe PASS-Key® II system to read the resistor pellet.See PASS-Key® II on page 2-17.

If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the light willcome on.

3-41

Cruise Control Light

The CRUISE light comeson whenever the cruisecontrol is set. See “CruiseControl” under TurnSignal/Multifunction Leveron page 3-5.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

If the LOW WASH lightcomes on when thewindshield washer paddleis used, this indicatesthat the fluid is low in thewindshield washerreservoir.

The light will also come on briefly when the ignition isturned on to show that it is working properly.

Door/Trunk Ajar Warning Light

The DOOR/TRUNK lightwill come on if the trunk orany door is not completelyclosed.

Service Vehicle Soon Light

The SERVICE VEHICLESOON light will come on ifthere are certainnon-emission relatedvehicle problems.

These problems may not be obvious and may affectvehicle performance or durability. Consult yourdealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicleperformance. The light will come on briefly whenignition is turned on to show that it is working properly.

3-42

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage indicates about how much fuel is left inthe fuel tank when the ignition is on. When the indicatornears empty, there is still a little fuel left, but youshould get more fuel soon.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicate thatanything is wrong with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the pump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than the gagereads. For example, the gage reads half full, butit took more, or less, than half of the tank’s capacityto fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or accelerating.

• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignitionis turned off.


3-43

Low Fuel Warning Light

If the vehicle’s fuel is low, a circular light on theinstrument panel cluster will come on and a chime willsound periodically until fuel is added to the fuel tank.

It will also come on for a few seconds when the ignitionis turned on as a check to indicate it is working. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixed.

Audio System(s)Notice: Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio – be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s very important todo it properly. Added sound equipment mayinterfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has been addedimproperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.

Your audio system has been designed to operate easilyand to give years of listening pleasure. You will getthe most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself withit first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,find out what your audio system can do and how tooperate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting themost out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audiosystem even after the ignition is turned off. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under IgnitionPositions on page 2-19.


3-44

Setting the TimePress and hold H until the correct hour appears on thedisplay. AM will appear for morning hours. Pressand hold M until the correct minute appears on thedisplay. The time may be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold H and M at the same time until TIME UPDATEDappears on the display. If the time is not available fromthe station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you havetuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take afew minutes for your time to update.

Radio with CD

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

3-45

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, youraudio system adjusts automatically to make up forroad and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, pushthe TUNE/AUDIO button repeatedly until SPEEDVOL is displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO button toselect OFF, MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher settingallows for more volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automaticallyincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noiseat any speed. The volume level should always soundthe same to you as you drive. If you don’t want touse SCV, select OFF.

DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.The time can be displayed with the ignition on or off.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,and AM. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the display. Theradio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then goon to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow againto stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and thepreset number appear on the display. You will heara double beep. The radio will go to the first presetstation stored on your pushbuttons, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next preset station. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are inthe selected band and only to those with a strongsignal.

3-46

Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the stationyou set will return and the equalization that youselected will be automatically stored for thatpushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID, orTREBLE appears on the display. Then turn theAUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station isweak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push andhold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you heara beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero, or TREBLEand a zero will appear on the display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controlsto the middle position, end out of audio mode bywaiting five seconds without making any changes. Thenpush and hold AUDIO for more than two secondsuntil you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear onthe display.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customizedequalization settings designed for country/western,jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

3-47

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release AUDIO untilBAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knobto move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.A bar graph with indicators will show how the soundis balanced.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appearson the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bargraph with indicators will show how the sound isbalanced.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, selectBAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for morethan two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicatorwill be centered on the display.


Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display,instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also providethe time of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

3-48

Finding a Program Type (PTY) StationTo select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.The PTY symbol will appear on the display.

2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you tothe PTY’s first station.

4. If you want to go to another station within that PTYand the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrowonce. If the PTY is not displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then togo to another station.

5. Press P-TYP to exit program type select mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.The PTY symbol will appear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and holdeither SEEK arrow, and the radio will beginscanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow to stop at astation.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to strongerstations.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

3-49

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stopduring the announcement. You will not be able to turnoff alert announcements.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message at your own speed, pressthe INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words willappear on the display with each press. Once thecomplete message has been displayed, INFO willdisappear from the display until another new messageis received. The old message can be displayed bypressing the INFO button. You can view an old messageuntil a new message is received or a different stationis tuned to.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from the tunedstation, press this button. Brackets will be displayedaround TRAF and when a traffic announcement comeson the tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio will seek to a station that does. When the radiofinds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,the radio will stop and brackets will be displayed aroundTRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,you can then press the TRAF button to removethe brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrowsto go to a station that supports traffic announcements.If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear onthe display.

Your radio will play the traffic announcements even ifthe volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of acassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

3-50

Radio Messages

CAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALappears on the display it means that your radio has notbeen configured properly for your vehicle and mustbe returned to the dealer for service.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in. The CD should begin playing. If youwant to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio isoff, first press the eject or DISP button.If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn on theignition or system, the CD will start playing whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDswith an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDsare loaded in the same manner.If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced level. Release it to play the passage. Thedisplay will show the elapsed time of the track.

2\(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced level. Release it to play the passage. Thedisplay will show the elapsed time of the track.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track isplaying. Press it again within five seconds to seehow long it has been playing. To change the default onthe display (track or elapsed time), press this buttonuntil you see the display you want, then hold the buttonuntil the display flashes. The selected display willnow be the default.

3-51

© SEEK¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track if more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the button or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving backward through the CD.

Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you holdthe button or press it more than once, the player willcontinue moving forward through the CD.

To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the display. You willhear a beep. The CD will go to the next track, play for afew seconds, then go on to the next track. The sound willmute and SCAN and the track number will appear on thedisplay while scanning. The CD will only scan forward.Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening tothe radio.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject maybe activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the ignition or radio off, if this buttonis pressed first.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radiodisplay, it could for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smooth, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

3-52

Radio with Cassette and CD

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, youraudio system adjusts automatically to make up forroad and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, pressthe TUNE/AUDIO knob repeatedly until SPEED VOLis displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO knob to select OFF,MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting allows formore volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increasesthe volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyspeed. The volume level should always sound the sameto you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV,select OFF.

DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.The time can be displayed with the ignition on or off.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,or AM. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

3-53

© SEEK¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the display. Theradio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then goon to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow againto stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for more than four seconds until SCAN andthe preset number appear on the display. You will heara double beep. The radio will go to the first presetstation stored on your pushbuttons, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next preset station. Presseither SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will seek and scan only to the stations thatare in the selected band and only to those with a strongsignal.

Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the station you setwill return and the equalization that you selectedwill be automatically stored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID, orTREBLE appears on the display. Then turn theAUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station isweak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push andhold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you heara beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero, or TREBLEand a zero will appear on the display.


EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customizedequalization settings designed for country/western,jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

3-54

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release AUDIO untilBAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knobto move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.A bar graph with indicators will show how the soundis balanced.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appearson the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bargraph with indicators will show how the sound isbalanced.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, selectBAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for morethan two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicatorwill be centered on the display.


Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display,instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also providethe time of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

3-55

Finding a Program Type (PTY) StationTo select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.The P-TYPE symbol will appear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you tothe PTY’s first station.

4. If you want to go to another station within that PTYand the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrowonce. If the PTY is not displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then togo to another station.

5. Press P-TYP to exit program type select mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search forstation with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.The P-TYPE symbol will appear on the display.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and holdeither SEEK arrow, and the radio will beginscanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow to stop at astation.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to strongerstations.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.When you turn the ignition off and then on again, thealternate frequency feature will automatically beturned on.

3-56

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette tape orCD is playing, play will stop during the announcement.You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message at your own speed, pressthe INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words willappear on the display with each press. Once thecomplete message has been displayed, INFO willdisappear from the display until another new messageis received. The old message can be displayed bypressing the INFO button. You can view and oldmessage until a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from the tunedstation, press this button. Brackets will be displayedaround TRAF and when a traffic announcement comeson the tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio will seek to a station that does. When the radiofinds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,the radio will stop and brackets will be displayed aroundTRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, youcan then press the TRAF button to remove thebrackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows togo to a station that supports traffic announcements.If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on thedisplay.

Your radio will play the traffic announcements even ifthe volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of acassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

3-57

Radio MessagesCAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALappears on the display it means that your radio has notbeen configured properly for your vehicle and mustbe returned to the dealer for service.

Playing a Cassette TapeYou tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longerthan that are so thin they may not work well in this player.The longer side with the tape visible should face to theright. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can beinserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or heara garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Pressthe eject button to remove the tape and start over.While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME and AUDIOcontrols just as you do for the radio. The display willshow an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.If you want to insert a tape while the ignition or radiois off, first press the eject or DISP button. Cassette tapeadapter kits for portable CD players will work in yourcassette tape player.Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal orchrome tape is inserted.If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette TapeMessages” later in this section.

1s(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reversequickly within the tape. The radio will play while the tapereverses. Press it again to return to playing speed.

2\(Forward): Press this pushbutton to advancequickly within the tape. The radio will play while the tapeadvances. Press this pushbutton again to return toplaying speed.

6 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side ofthe tape.

© SEEK¨: Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for seek towork. Press the left or the right arrow to go to theprevious or to the next selection on the tape. SEEK anda negative or positive number will be displayed.Pressing the left or right arrow multiple times willincrease the number of selections to be searched upto -5 or +5. If -5 or +5 is shown on the display thecassette tape player will fast forward or rewind throughthe four selections and stop at the fifth selection.

To scan cassette tape selections, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for two seconds until SCN appears onthe display. You will hear a beep. The tape will go to thenext selection, play for a few seconds, then go on tothe next selection. The cassette tape will only scanforward. Press either SEEK arrow again to stopscanning.

3-58

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive cassette orCD will remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape ora CD when listening to the radio.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a tape. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. Cassettes may be loaded with the ignition or radiooff if you press this button first.

Cassette Tape MessagesIf an error message appears on the display, it could befor one of the following reasons:

• TIGHT TAPE: The tape is tight and the playercannot turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape.Hold the tape with the open end down and try toturn the right hub counterclockwise with apencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubsdo not turn easily, your tape may be damagedand should not be used in the player. Try a newtape to make sure your player is working properly.

• BROKEN TAPE: The tape is broken. Try anew tape.

CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on thedisplay, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. Itwill still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon aspossible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. SeeCare of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-63.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror number, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player with yourcassette tape player after activating the bypass featureon your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.

4. Press and hold the CD TAPE button until READYappears on the display.

The override feature will remain active until the ejectbutton is pressed.

3-59

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in. The CD should begin playing. If youwant to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio isoff, first press the eject button or DISP.

If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn on theignition or system, the CD will start playing whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track start to play, the track number willappear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDswith an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDsare loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage.

2\(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play thepassage.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track isplaying. Press it again within five seconds to seehow long it has been playing. To change the default onthe display (track or elapsed time), press this buttonuntil you see the display you want, then hold the buttonuntil the display flashes. The selected display willnow be the default.

© SEEK¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track if more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the button or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving backward through the CD.

Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you holdthe button or press it more than once, the player willcontinue moving forward through the CD.

3-60

To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the display. You willhear a beep. The CD will go to the next track, play for afew seconds, then go on to the next track. The sound willmute and SCAN and the track number will appear on thedisplay. The CD will only scan forward. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive cassette orCD will remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape ora CD when listening to the radio.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a tape. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the ignition or radio off if youpress this button first.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radiodisplay, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smooth, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

3-61

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourradio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radiofunctions whenever battery power is removed and theradio is placed in a different vehicle. This featurerequires no user input to be activated. It is automaticallyarmed when it is put into the vehicle for the first time.

When the ignition is turned off, the blinking red lightindicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.

If THEFTLOCK® is activated, your radio will not operateif stolen. The radio will display LOCKED and a redLED indicator light will come on above the key symbolto indicate a locked condition. If this occurs, the radio willneed to be returned to the dealer.

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsIf your vehicle has this feature, you can control certainradio functions using the buttons on your steeringwheel.

w SEEKx: Press the up or the down arrow to seekto the next or to the previous radio station.

If a cassette tape or CD is playing, the player willadvance to the next or the previous selection.

3-62

SCAN: Press this button and SCAN will appear on thedisplay. The radio will go to the first preset stationon your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go tothe next preset station. The radio will scan presetstations with a strong signal only. Press SCAN again tostop scanning.

AM FM: Press this button to choose FM1, FM2, or AM.If a cassette tape or CD is playing, press this buttonto listen to the radio. The inactive cassette or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a cassettetape or CD when listening to the radio.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the audio system.Press it again to turn on the sound.

w VOLx (Volume): Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease volume.

Understanding Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise.

FMFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.

Care of Your Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, andextreme heat. If they are not, they may not operateproperly or they may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEANPLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. Ifthis message appears on the display, your cassette tapeplayer needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, butyou should clean it as soon as possible to preventdamage to your tapes and player. If you notice areduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette tosee if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If thisother cassette has no improvement in sound quality,clean the tape player.

3-63

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasivecleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tapehead as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Therecommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealership.

The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tapeplayer may identify the cleaning cassette tape asa damaged tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects,insert the cassette at least three times to ensurethorough cleaning.

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-typecleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt toclean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette willnot eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleanermay not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing typecleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-typecleaning cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold the ejectbutton for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYERindicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicatorwas reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound qualitymay degrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in good condition before you have your tapeplayer serviced.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from directsunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edgesor the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it.

Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightenedto the fender. If tightening is required, tighten byhand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.

3-64

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-9Steering ......................................................4-10Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-14Driving at Night ............................................4-16Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17City Driving ..................................................4-20

Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24Winter Driving ..............................................4-26If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice

or Snow ...................................................4-30Towing ..........................................................4-31

Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-31Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-34Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-39

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-6.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turnsuddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from thedriving task — such as concentrating on a cellulartelephone call, reading, or reaching for something on

the floor — makes proper defensive driving moredifficult and can even cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, orpull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.These simple defensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a needto take sudden action, as when a child darts intothe street? A person with even a moderate BAC mightnot be able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

4-4

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research showsthat alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinalcord or heart. This means that when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,that person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled is higher than if the person had not beendrinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand judgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You can have aserious — or even fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steeringand the accelerator. All three systems have to do theirwork at the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. Also see Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 4-9.

4-5

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle movingat 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keepingenough space between your vehicle and others isimportant.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have timeto cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.

If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better braking andlonger brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light onthe instrument panel will come on briefly when youstart your vehicle.


4-6

When you start your engine, or when you begin to driveaway, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

4-7

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feela slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into a situationthat requires hard braking.

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and holdit down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels

can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can notrespond to your steering. Momentum will carry itin whatever direction it was headed when the wheelsstopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the verything you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do this bypushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasingpressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze thebrakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear orfeel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.This will help you retain steering control. If you do haveanti-lock, it is different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System”in this section.

In many emergencies, steering can help you more thaneven the very best braking.

4-8

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)If the vehicle has an Enhanced Traction System (ETS) itwill limit wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat one or both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine power and may also upshiftthe transaxle to limit wheel spin.

This light will come on theinstrument panel clusterwhile the ETS is limitingwheel spin. See EnhancedTraction System WarningLight on page 3-34.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this isnormal.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the enhancedtraction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow safe use of it again, you can re-engagethe cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

The ETS operates in THIRD (3) and OVERDRIVE (X).If the vehicle is in THIRD (3), the system can upshiftthe transaxle to OVERDRIVE (X). The ETS is turnedoff in SECOND (2) or FIRST (1) gear, and when theparking brake is set. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 2-22.

While the ETS is on, thiswarning light will come onthe instrument panelcluster to show that thesystem is not limitingwheel spin.

See Enhanced Traction System Warning Light onpage 3-34. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, the ETS should always be left on. But thesystem can be turned off. The ETS should be turned offif the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snowand rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking YourVehicle To Get It Out” under If You Are Stuck: InSand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-30.

4-9

To turn the system off, move the gear shift lever toFIRST (1) or SECOND (2) gear. See “Rocking YourVehicle To Get It Out” under If You Are Stuck: In Sand,Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-30. When the system isturned off, the TRAC OFF warning light will come on andstay on. If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when thesystem is turned off, the TRAC OFF light will comeon – but the ETS will not turn off right away. It willcontinue to operate until there is no longer a need tolimit wheel spin.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angleat which the curve is banked, and your speed. While youare in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do their workwhere the tires meet the road. Unless you havefour-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking candemand too much of those places. You can losecontrol.

4-10

The same thing can happen if you are steering througha sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Thosetwo control systems — steering and acceleration — canoverwhelm those places where the tires meet theroad and make you lose control. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 4-9.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you can not; there is notroom. That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes — but, unless youhave anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels. SeeBraking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right depending onthe space available.

4-11

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have dropped offthe edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’redriving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

4-12

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces your areaof vision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a “running start” that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

4-13

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.)

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes,steering and acceleration) do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

4-14

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slipand lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,you will want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor braking (including engine braking by shifting to alower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice or packed snowon the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: Ithelps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not haveanti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels areno longer rolling), release enough pressure on thebrakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restoressteering control. Push the brake pedal down steadilywhen you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheelsare rolling, you will have steering control.

4-15

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you can not see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

4-16

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-17

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the roadand even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you can not, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-18

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, andraindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low water crossing,your vehicle can be carried away. As little assix inches of flowing water can carry awaya smaller vehicle. If this happens, you andother vehicle occupants could drown. Do notignore police warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 5-57.

4-19

City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-20

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed tothe posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour “blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certainyou allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

4-21

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not to your senseof motion. After driving for any distance at higherspeeds, you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-22

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as “highwayhypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, orwhatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires onthe road, the drone of the engine, and the rush ofthe wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehiclecan leave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

4-23

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling systemand transaxle. These parts can work hard onmountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

4-24

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

4-25

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, ifyou will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-26

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offerthe least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it isabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sandcrews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow — drive with caution.

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System, keepthe system on. It will improve your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even though yourvehicle has this system, you will want to slow down andadjust your driving to the road conditions. SeeEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9.

Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you willwant to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock brakingsystem or not, you will want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lockbrakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up onthe brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadilyto get the most traction you can.

4-27

Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you canstill steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can not reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

4-28

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You can not see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, butyou must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transaxle or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transaxle backand forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-73.

4-30

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. If you have theEnhanced Traction System, you should turn thesystem off. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 4-9. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) gear.The Enhanced Traction System will be turned offin FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) gear. Spin the wheels aslittle as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningyour wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries, youmay need to be towed out. If you do need to betowed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

4-31

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as dinghy towing, towing the vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a dolly.

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, youwill want to make sure your vehicle is prepared tobe towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Tripon page 4-22.

4-32

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all fourwheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that followsfor more information.

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow yourvehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove theignition key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

4-33

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

Example 1

4-34

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

The Tire and Loading Information label shows theseating capacity and the total weight your vehicle canproperly carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacityweight. If your vehicle has the Tire and LoadingInformation label, Example 1, the label is attached tothe center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. If yourvehicle has the Tire-Loading Information label,Example 2, the label is on the inside trunk lid.

The Tire and Loading Information label also gives youthe size and recommended inflation pressure forthe factory-installed, original equipment tires on yourvehicle. For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 5-57 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-64.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Example 2

4-35

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there willbe five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-39 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Loading Your VehicleItem Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)

B Subtract Occupant Weight @150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =

300 lbs(136 kg)

C Available Occupant and CargoWeight =

700 lbs(317 kg)

Example 1

4-36



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


750 lbs(340 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs(113 kg)



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


1000 lbs(453 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight 0 lbs(0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information labelfor specific information about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers, and cargo should neverexceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

4-37

Certification Label The Certification label, found on the rear edge ofthe driver’s door tells the gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load, spread itout. Do not carry more than 167 lbs (75 kg) in your trunk.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

4-38

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages or any thing elseare put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In atrunk, put them as far forward as you can.Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with theproper trailer towing equipment. To identify whatthe vehicle trailering capacity is for the vehicle, read theinformation in “Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section. But trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.

4-39

Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read this section carefullybefore pulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,wheel assembly, and tires are forced to work harderagainst the drag of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higher speeds andunder greater loads, generating extra heat. Whatis more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you will be driving. A good sourcefor this information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) the vehicle is driven. The engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that thevehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.This helps the engine and other parts of the vehiclewear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Do not drive faster than the maximum postedspeed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.

There are three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• The weight of the trailer.

• The weight of the trailer tongue.

• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

4-40

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull atrailer are all important. And, it can also depend onany special equipment that is on the vehicle.

Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,or you can write us at:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo in it,and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. Ifthere are a lot of options, equipment, passengers orcargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight thevehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you

must add the tongue load to the GVW because thevehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-34 for more informationabout the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

When using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent to 15 percentof the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and thetongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.The correct weight could be achieved simply by movingsome items around in the trailer.

4-41

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. These numbers can be found on theTire-Loading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-34. Be sure not to go over the GVWlimit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue. If a weight distribution hitchis used, make sure not to go over the rear axle limitbefore applying the weight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Hereare some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intendedfor hitches. Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to it. Use only aframe-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

• If holes need to be made in the body of the vehicleto install a trailer hitch, then be sure to seal the holeslater when the hitch is removed. If the holes are notsealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 2-29. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsChains should always be attached between the vehicleand the trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack so the rig can be turned.And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesBecause the vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try totap into the vehicle’s brake system. If that is done,both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, get to know therig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling andbraking with the added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle is now a good deallonger and not nearly as responsive as the vehicle isby itself.

4-42

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check theelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead aswhen driving the vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp avoid situations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.

PassingMore passing distance is needed up ahead whentowing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is a good deallonger with the trailer, you will need to go much fartherbeyond the vehicle you have passed before youcan return to the proper lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns thannormal. Do this so the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

4-43

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen towing a trailer, the vehicle may need a differentturn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check withyour dealer. The arrows on the instrument panel willflash whenever signaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,telling other drivers you are about to turn, change lanesor stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. You may think drivers behind youare seeing your signal when they are not. It is importantto check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs arestill working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before startingdown a long hill or steep downgrade. If the vehicleis not shifted down, the brakes might have to beused so much that they would get hot and no longerwork well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce thevehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

If towing a trailer, you may want to drive in THIRD (3)instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X). Shiftto a lower gear as needed.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, here ishow to do it:

1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer’swheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply the parkingbrake, and shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

4-44

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• Start the engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingThe vehicle will need service more often when it pulls atrailer. See.Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 formore information. Things that are especially important intrailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid; whichshould not be overfilled; engine oil, drive belt, coolingsystem, and brake system. Each of these is coveredin this manual, and the Index will help you findthem quickly. If trailering, it is a good idea to review thisinformation before starting on a trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingThe cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-25.

4-45

✍ NOTES

4-46

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ......................................................5-4Fuel ................................................................5-4

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-5Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-10Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-13Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-19Engine Coolant .............................................5-22Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-25Engine Overheating .......................................5-25Cooling System ............................................5-28Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36Brakes ........................................................5-38

Battery ........................................................5-41Jump Starting ...............................................5-42

Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-49Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-51

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-51Headlamps ..................................................5-51Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-52Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-53Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-54Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-55

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-56Tires ..............................................................5-57

Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-64Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-65Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-67When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-68Buying New Tires .........................................5-69Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-70Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-71Wheel Replacement ......................................5-72Tire Chains ..................................................5-73If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-74Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-75Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-87

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Appearance Care ............................................5-88Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-88Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-91Weatherstrips ...............................................5-91Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-91Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-93Finish Damage .............................................5-93Underbody Maintenance ................................5-94Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-94Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-95

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-96Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-96Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-96

Electrical System ............................................5-97Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-97Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-97Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-97Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-97Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-97

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.


5-3


• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehiclecan affect the airflow around it. This may causewind noise and affect windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer before adding equipment tothe outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you mayget a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. Otherwise, you might damageyour engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerateor drive uphill is considered normal. This does notindicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel isnecessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octanefuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.

5-4

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-Wide FuelCharter which is available from the Alliance ofAutomobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.Gasoline meeting these specifications could provideimproved driveability and emission control systemperformance compared to other gasoline.

In Canada, look for the“Auto Makers’ Choice”label on the pump.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-36 )and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

Canada Only

5-5

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to workproperly. You should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations. GeneralMotors recommends that you buy gasolines thatare advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand ofgasoline.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors doesnot recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs andthe performance of the emission control system maybe affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer forservice.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-6

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

Turn the vehicle off to refuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged dooron the driver’s side of the vehicle. To remove thefuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel caphas a spring in it; so if it is released too soon, it willspring back.

5-7

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tetherbelow the fuel fill opening.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can sprayout on you if you open the fuel cap tooquickly. This spray can happen if your tank isnearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thefuel tank. Wait a few seconds after filling the fueltank before removing the fuel pump nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeCleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-91.

5-8

When putting the fuel cap back on, turn it clockwiseuntil a click is heard. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. This would allowfuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-36.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-36.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-9

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease handle locatedbelow the instrumentpanel, to the left of thesteering column.

5-10

2. Push the secondary hood release, located underthe hood, to the right to disengage it.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, make sure all of the filler capsare properly secured. Pull the hood down and closeit firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, you will see:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-36.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit

Breakers on page 5-97.D. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 5-42.E. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap

on page 5-25.F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant

on page 5-22.G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 5-35.H. Electric Engine Cooling Fan. See Jump Starting on

page 5-42.I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.K. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic

Transaxle Fluid on page 5-19.L. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-38.M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes todrain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oildipstick might not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, then you will need to add at least onequart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oilcrankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specificationson page 5-103.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, your engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.Push the dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-14

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,you may use SAE 10W-30.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

5-15

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either anSAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protection foryour engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil(GM Oil Life System)Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to workproperly, you must reset the system every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON light will come on.Change your oil as soon as possible within the nexttwo times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuine GMparts and reset the system. It is also important to checkyour oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must changeyour oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

5-16

How to Reset the CHANGE OIL SOONLightThe GM Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytimeyour oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE OIL SOON light being turned on, resetthe system.

After changing the engine oil, reset the system byperforming the following steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within five seconds.If the CHANGE OIL SOON light flashes, the systemis resetting.

3. Turn the key to OFF, then start the vehicle. The oillife will change to 100 percent.If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

5-17

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forlocation of engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil changeand replace at the first oil change after 25,000 miles(40 000 km).

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove it from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do thefollowing:

1. Loosen the screw and clamp on the air duct.

2. Lift the two clipslocated on the top ofthe filter assemblyto unlock the cover.

3. Disconnect the duct and reposition it while removingthe cover.

4. Pull out the filter.

5. Inspect or replace the filter if needed.

6. Reinstall the filter.

7. Push the two clips located on top of the filterassembly to lock the cover.

5-18

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and ChangeA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluid levelis when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or deliveryservice.

If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles(166 000 km).

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

5-19

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealership servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage thetransaxle. Too much can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall on hot engine orexhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if you check the transaxlefluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxlefluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°Fto 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have todrive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

• Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

5-20

The automatic transaxlefluid dipstick handle is theblack loop locatedtoward the rear of theengine. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way.

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transaxle fluid to use. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area onthe dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeledother than DEXRON ®-III may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use DEXRON ®-III labeled automatictransaxle fluid.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check,” earlier inthis section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way.

5-21

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if onlyDEX-COOL® extended life coolant is added.

The following explains the cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If there is a problemwith engine overheating or if coolant needs to be addedto the radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-25.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damagealuminum parts. If this coolant mixture is used, nothingelse needs to be added.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

5-22

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If coolant has to be added more than four times a year,have your dealer check the cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking CoolantThe engine coolant recovery tank is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle at the rear of the enginecompartment. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on alevel surface. When theengine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at theCOLD mark or a littlehigher.

When the engine is warm, the level should be up to theHOT mark or a little higher.

5-23

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, addcoolant to the radiator. See “How to Add Coolant to theRadiator” later in this section.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. With the coolant recovery tank, you willalmost never have to add coolant at theradiator. Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,see Cooling System on page 5-28.

5-24

Radiator Pressure CapNotice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is apressure-type cap and must be tightly installed toprevent coolant loss and possible engine damagefrom overheating. Be sure the arrows on the capline up with the overflow tube on the radiatorfiller neck.

The radiator pressure cap is located near the front ofthe engine compartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingThe coolant temperature gage and the engine coolanttemperature warning light on the instrument panelcan indicate an overheated engine condition. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-35 andEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 3-35.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThe emergency engine protection operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated engine conditionexists, this protection mode alternates firing groupsof cylinders to help prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, there will be a significant loss in power andengine performance. The engine coolant temperaturegage indicator will move to the red area, and, the enginecoolant temperature warning light will come on,showing that an overheated engine condition exists.Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheated protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-13.

5-25

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it.



Just turn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until there isno sign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See “Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode” under Engine Overheating on page 5-25for information on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” under EngineOverheating on page 5-25 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

5-26

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheated engine warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an overheated engine warning and you do notsee or hear any steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hotwhen the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

• Tows a trailer.

If an overheated engine warning appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Adjust the heater to the highest temperature andfan speed settings and open the window asnecessary.

If the overheated engine warnings no longer exist, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If the warnings do not come back on, youcan drive normally.

If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for threeminutes while you are parked. If the warning stillexists, turn off the engine and get everyone out of thevehicle until it cools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously inthis section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

5-27

Cooling SystemWhen it is safe to lift the hood, this is what will be seen:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Electric Engine Cooling FanC. Radiator Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,do not do anything else until it cools down. Thevehicle should be parked on a level surface.

5-28

When the engine is cold,the coolant level should beat or above the COLDmark on the coolantrecovery tank. If it is not,there may be a leakat the pressure cap or inthe radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator,water pump, or somewhereelse in the coolingsystem.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the engine is overheating, both fans should berunning. If they are not the vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. See“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”in the Index for information on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-29

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf a problem has not been found yet, but the coolantlevel is not at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® enginecoolant at the coolant recovery tank. See EngineCoolant on page 5-22 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-30

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at theCOLD mark, start the vehicle.

If the overheated engine warnings continue, there isone more thing that can be done. Add the proper coolantmixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap — even a little — they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

5-31

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiatorfill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause your engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

Remove the radiator pressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the radiator pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise atits first stop. Do not press down while turning thepressure cap.

If a hiss is heard, wait for it to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap, but now push downas you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-32

3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleedvalves. There are two bleed valves.

One is located on thethermostat housing.

The other is located on thethermostat bypass tube.

4. Fill the radiator with theproper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture,up to the base of thefiller neck. SeeEngine Coolant onpage 5-22 for moreinformation about theproper coolant mixture.

If a stream of coolant is coming from an air bleedvalve, close the valve. Otherwise, close thevalves after the radiator is filled.

5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engineand the compartment.

5-33

6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLDmark on the coolant recovery tank.

7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressure cap off.

8. Start the engine and let it run until the upperradiator hose feels it is getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.

9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiatorfiller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until the level reachesthe base of the filler neck.

5-34

10. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time duringthis procedure if coolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be surethe arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this.

11. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level inthe coolant recovery tank should be at the HOTmark when the engine is hot or at the COLD markwhen the engine is cold.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir is located at the backof the engine compartment, on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forreservoir location.

5-35

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless there appears to be a leak in the system or anunusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, thenunscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Thenremove the cap again and look at the fluid level on thedipstick.

When the enginecompartment is hot, thelevel should be at theH (hot) mark. When it iscold, the level should be atthe C (cold) mark. If thefluid is at the ADDmark, fluid should beadded.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid. Failure touse the proper fluid can cause leaks and damagehoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, besure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.If the vehicle will be operating in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

5-36

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forreservoir location.

Add washer fluid until the windshield washer reservoiris full.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.

5-37

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during

normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

5-38

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brakewarning light will come on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-32.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake systemparts so badly that they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in the wrong kind offluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-88.


5-39

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving (except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly).

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hear thebrake wear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

5-40

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour new vehicle comes with a maintenance freeACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, getone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

battery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-42 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare yourvehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 3-62.

5-41

Jump StartingIf the battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start the vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransaxle in PARK (P)or a manual transmission inNEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake.

5-42

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or in the auxiliary power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the vehicle’s radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal location oneach vehicle. You will not need to access yourbattery for jump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump starting terminal for that purpose.The terminal is located on the same side of theengine compartment as your battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal,squeeze the sides of the red plastic cap and pull itupward. Always use the remote positive (+)terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on thebattery.

5-43

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the ACDelco ® batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if a battery



has filler caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add water to take careof that first. If you do not, explosive gas couldbe present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5-44

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-45

7. Do not let the otherend touch metal.Connect it to thepositive (+) terminalof the good battery.Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect thenegative (−) cable tothe negative (−)terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal part, or to the remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

5-46

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

5-47

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in thewrong order, electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Remove the jumpercables in the correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-48

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a headlamp system equipped withhorizontal and vertical aim indicators. The aim has beenpre-set at the factory and should need no furtheradjustment. This is true even though the vertical andhorizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly onthe “0” (zero) marks on their scales.

If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlampaim may be affected. Aim adjustment may benecessary if it is difficult to see lane markers, forhorizontal aim, or if oncoming drivers flash their highbeams at you, for vertical aim. If you believe theheadlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend thatyou take it to your dealer for service; however, it ispossible for you to re-aim the headlamps as describedin the following procedure.

Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimedproperly, read all the instructions before beginning.Failure to follow these instructions could causedamage to headlamp parts.

To check the aim, the vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:

• The headlamps must be off for one hour prior toaiming and must remain off during this procedure.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectlylevel surface.

• If necessary, pads may be used on an unevensurface to help level the vehicle.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mudattached to it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.

• There should not be any cargo or loading ofthe vehicle. It should however, have a full fueltank and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) onthe driver’s seat.

• Close all doors.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.

5-49

A. Vertical Aim Adjustment ScrewB. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Screw

Open the hood and locate the vertical and horizontalaim indicators. The aiming screw for the verticalaim indicator (A) is at the center of the headlamp coverand the aiming screw for the horizontal aim indicator (B)is on the outboard side of the headlamp cover.

A. Horizontal Aim Adjustment ScrewB. Horizontal Block Index PlateC. Vertical Aiming Level

Start with the horizontal aim. The adjustment screwscan be turned with an E8 Torx® socket.Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust thevertical aim.

1. Turn the horizontal aiming screw until the indicatoris lined up with zero.

2. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the level bubbleis lined up with zero.

Driver’s Side Headlamp Shown Passenger’s Side Headlamp Shown

5-50

Bulb ReplacementFor any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer. For the type of bulb, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-55.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

Headlamps1. Open the hood.

2. Pull up on the headlamp retainers (A) to release theassembly locator tabs.

5-51

3. Disconnect the electrical connector (B) from theheadlamp assembly.

4. Slide the headlamp assembly out of the slots.

5. Remove the rubber access cover from behind thebulb being replaced.

6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn and remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

7. Lift the plastic locking tab on the electrical connectorand pull the connector from the headlamp bulbsocket.

8. Connect the new headlamp bulb to the electricalconnector, making sure the connector tab snapsinto place.

9. Insert the bulb socket into the headlamp assembly.

10. Reverse all steps to reassemble the headlampassembly, then check the lamps.

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLamps

1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to theremoval procedure earlier in this section.

2. Remove the rubber bulb access cover.

3. Twist the sidemarker lamp socket, located on theoutboard side of the headlamp assembly,counterclockwise and pull it from the headlampassembly.

4. Holding the base of the socket, pull the old bulbfrom the socket.

5. Push the new bulb into the socket.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the lampassembly.

5-52

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

1. Open the trunk.

2. Reach through the access opening in the trunk lid.

3. Remove the old bulb by turning it counterclockwiseone-quarter turn.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.

5. Turn the socket clockwise one-quarter turn toreinstall.

5-53

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the convenience net If the vehiclehas one.

3. Remove the three plastic wing nuts (A).One wing nut is located on top of the carpet. Theother two are located underneath the carpet.

4. Pull the taillamp housing (B) away from the body ofthe vehicle.

5. Squeeze the tab on the socket and turn the socketcounterclockwise.

6. Pull out the socket.

7. Pull the old bulb out of the socket. There are twobulbs on each taillamp.

8. Push in a new bulb.

9. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.

5-54

Back-Up Lamps

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the seven hex nuts (A) from the lampcovering.

3. Remove the lamp covering.

4. Twist and pull the bulb socket (B) from the trunk lid.

5. Twist and pull the old bulb from the bulb socket.

6. Twist and push the new bulb into the lamp socket.

7. Twist and push the lamp socket into the trunklid covering.

8. Reverse Steps 2 and 3 to reinstall the lampcovering.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamps Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamps 1156

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 3155

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLamps 4157NAK

High-Beam Headlamps 9005

Low-Beam Headlamps 9006

Taillamps and Stoplamps/TurnSignal 3057

Taillamp 194

For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.

5-55

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected for wearor cracking each time maintenance is performed.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

1. Turn on the wipers to LO.

2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at theouter positions of the wiper pattern. The bladesare more accessible for removal or replacementwhile in this position.

3. Pull the windshield wiper arm 3 to 4 inches(7.5 to 10 cm) away from the windshield.

4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,push the release clip from under the windshieldwiper arm connecting point and slide the bladeassembly down toward the glass to remove it fromthe wiper arm.

5. Slide the new wiper blade securely on the wiperarm until you hear the release clip click intoplace. See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-13 for the type of windshield wiperblades to use.

5-56

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index.

• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

5-57

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typical passengercar tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger Car Tire Example

5-58

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’sspecific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For more information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

5-59

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a tread life of approximately3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be drivenat speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a regular road tirehas lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-87 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-74.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may have thedate of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. See Compact Spare Tireon page 5-87 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).For more information on tire pressure and inflation seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-60

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbersdefine a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype and service description. The letter “T” as thefirst character in the tire size means the tire is fortemporary use only.

(G) Tire Performance Criteria Specification(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’sspecific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of a typicalpassenger car tire size.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by theU. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” ofthe illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is70% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” meansdiagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These characters representthe load range and the speed rating of a tire. Theload range represents the load carrying capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tireis certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from “A”to “Z”.

5-61

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)before a tire has built up heat from driving.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT code includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which canalso identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-34.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-62

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupantsa vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that faces outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand and or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

5-63

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When ItIs Time for New Tires on page 5-68.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tireinformation system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-70.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-34.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-34.

Inflation - Tire PressureThe tire and loading information label, shows the correctinflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-34, for the locationof your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflationor overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you can getthe following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Bad wear

• Bad handling

• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Bad handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-64

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should beat 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe tire inflation monitor system detects differences intire rotation speeds that are caused by changes intire pressure. The system can alert you if a tire islow – but it does not replace normal tire maintenance.See Tires on page 5-57.

When the LOW TIRE light comes on the instrumentpanel, stop as soon as you can and check all the tiresfor damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flaton page 5-74. Also, check the tire pressure in all fourtires as soon as possible. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-64.

In order for the tire inflation system to function properly,the vehicle must be driven between 45 and 90 minutesbefore the system determines the tire pressure ineach tire. The driving time may be longer depending onan individual’s driving habits. The data does not haveto be accumulated during a single trip. Once determined,the system will store the tire pressures until thesystem is reset.

5-65

The system normally takes 15 to 20 minutes of drivingtime in each of three speed ranges to determinetire pressures. The speed ranges are 15 to 40 mph(25 to 65 km/h), 40 to 65 mph (65 to 105 km/h)and above 65 mph (105 km/h). When the storage of thetire inflation information is complete, the LOW TIRElight will come on the instrument panel after twoto eight minutes if one tire is inflated 12 psi (83 kPa)less than the other three tires. Detection thresholdsmay be higher and detection times may be longer onrough roads, curves and at high speeds. The system isnot capable of inflation differences at speeds greaterthan 70 mph (110 km/h).

The tire inflation monitor system will not alert you if thepressure in more than one tire is low, if the systemis not properly calibrated, or if the vehicle is movingfaster than 70 mph (110 km/h).

The LOW TIRE light will stay on while the ignition is on,until the system is reset

Do not reset the tire inflation monitor system withoutfirst correcting the cause of the problem and checkingand adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If thesystem is reset when the tire pressures are incorrect, itwill not function properly and may not alert you whena tire is low.

Any time a tire’s pressure is adjusted, the tires arerotated, or one or more tires is repaired or replaced, thetire inflation monitor system will need to be reset. Thesystem also needs to be reset when new tires arepurchased and if the vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected.

To reset the system:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN.

2. Remove the passenger’s side instrument panelcover to get to the fuse block.

3. Press and hold the RESET button in the fuse blockfor about five seconds.

4. The LOW TIRE light will come on and flashthree times. Then it will go off. If the light doesnot go off, see your dealer for service.

5-66

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-68 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-72 for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for scheduled rotation intervals.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Reset the Tire Inflation Monitor System. See TirePressure Monitor System on page 5-65.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-103.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a FlatTire” in the Index.

5-67

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-68

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires your vehicleneeds, look at the tire and loading information label. Formore information about this label and its location onyour vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,GM recommends that you get tires with that sameTPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,ride and other things during normal service on yourvehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (formud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating and construction type(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels. It’s all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, it was developedfor use on your vehicle. See “Compact SpareTire” in the index.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-69

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance.(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-70

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing arenot needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.

5-71

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-75 for moreinformation.

5-72

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Install themon the front tires and tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

5-73

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-74

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’tmove, you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tire on the otherside of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps tell how to use the jack and changea tire.

5-75

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is in the trunk.

1. Turn the center nut onthe compact spare tirecover counterclockwiseto remove it. Thenlift and removethe cover. SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 5-87 for moreinformation about thecompact spare tire.

2. Remove the spare tire.

5-76

3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),extension and protection guide (B) and wheelwrench (C).

5-77

Removing the Wheel CoversIf the vehicle has wheel covers, be sure to use a wheelwrench to begin the process of loosening the plasticwheel nut caps.

Once the plastic nut capshave been loosened withthe wheel wrench,finish loosening them withyour fingers.

Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry alongthe edge of the wheel cover until it comes off. Becareful; the edge may be sharp. Do not try to removethe cover with your bare hands.

Removing the Wheel Center Caps

To remove a center cap,use the wrench to prygently at the notch. Do notuse a tool that is narrowerthan the wrench to pryat this notch. Then pry offthe cap.

5-78

Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts,but do not remove them yet.

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jacklift head.

3. For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put thejack lift head (C) about 6 inches (15 cm) from therear edge of the front wheel opening (B) or justbehind the two bolts (A) as shown.

5-79

For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put thejack lift head (B) about 5 inches (13 cm) fromthe front edge of the rear wheel opening (C) or justbehind the off-set (A) as shown.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

5-80

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground for the spare compact tire to fit underneaththe wheel well.

6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-81

7. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-82

8. Install the compact spare tire.Put the wheel nuts backon with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward thewheel. Tighten each nut byhand until the wheel isheld against the hub.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-83

10. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.



Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See “Capacitiesand Specifications” in the Index for wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See “Capacities andSpecifications” in the index for the wheel nut torquespecification.

Do not try to put the wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compactspare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compactspare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

5-84

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

After the compact spare tire is put on the vehicle, storethe flat tire in the trunk. Use the following procedureto secure the flat tire in the trunk. When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the

protector, located in the foam holder, to help avoidwheel surface damage. To store a full-size tire, placethe tire valve stem facing down, and then removethe protector and attach the retainer securely. Store thecover as far forward as possible.

5-85

Storing the Spare Tire and ToolsWhen storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put theprotector/guide back in the foam holder.

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replacethe compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soonas you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-87. Seethe storage instructions label to return the compactspare to the trunk properly.

Be sure to calibrate low tire inflation system after youreplace the compact spare tire with a full-sized tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Compact Spare TireD. NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension and ProtectorH. Bolt ScrewI. Foam Holder

5-86

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenthe vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, checkto make sure it is correctly inflated. The compactspare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km).However, It is best to replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. The spare will lastlonger and be in good shape in case it is needed again.The tire inflation monitor system must be reset afterinstalling or removing the compact spare. See TirePressure Monitor System on page 5-65.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake your vehicle through an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact spare can get caughton the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with otherwheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire andits wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.Using them can damage your vehicle and candamage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains onyour compact spare.

5-87

Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closedspace. When you use anything from a container to cleanyour vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings and instructions. And always open your doorsor windows when you are cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these unless this manual says youcan. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery well.

You can get GM-approved cleaning products from yourdealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 5-95.

5-88

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can — beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a cleanarea often. A soft brush may be used if stains arestubborn.

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any

loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Follow the directions on the container label.

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturatethe material and do not rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use asponge to remove any excess cleaner.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampenedtowel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructionsdescribed earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treatthe area with a water and baking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

5-89

Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Youmay have to do this more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou do not get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger and the integrated radio antenna. Whencleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.

5-90

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth at least every sixmonths. During very cold, damp weather more frequentapplication may be required. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.

5-91

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-95.

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. Theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain

on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Cleaning Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the bladeor windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

5-92

Cleaning Aluminum WheelsKeep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas offinish damage can be corrected in your dealer’sbody and paint shop.

5-93

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan andexhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-94

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches and otherlight surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, leather andcarpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12.

5-95

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is located on the inside of the trunk lid. It isvery helpful if parts need to be ordered for the vehicle. Ithas the following information printed on it:

• The VIN

• The model designation

• Paint information

• A list of all production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

5-96

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

The vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to the vehicle, see ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker inthe underhood fuse block. An electrical overload willcause the headlamps to go on and off, or in some casesto remain off. If this happens, have the headlampsystem checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Ifthe overload is caused by some electrical problem, haveit fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse blockprotect the power windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breakeropens and closes, protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand in the fuse block wiring itself. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be surea bad fuse is replaced with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

5-97

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Some fuses are located ina fuse block on thepassenger’s side of theinstrument panel. Pull offthe cover labeledFUSES to expose thefuse block.

5-98

CircuitBreakers Usage

TIRE RESET Tire Inflation Monitor Reset ButtonPWR/WNDW

PWR S/ROOF Power Windows, Power Sunroof

R/DEFOG Rear Window DefoggerPWR/ SEAT Power Seat

Blank Not Used

Fuses UsagePRK/LCK Ignition Key Solenoid

Blank Not UsedBlank Not Used

PCM,BCM, U/H

Ignition Signal: Hot in Run and Start,Powertrain Control Module, BodyControl Module, Underhood Relay

RADIO PREM.SOUND Remote Radio Premium Sound

PWR MIR Power MirrorsBlank Not Used

INT/ILLUM Panel DimmingBlank Not Used

IGN 0: CLSTR,PCM & BCM

Ignition Signal: Hot in Run, Unlockand Start; Cluster, PowertrainControl Module, Body ControlModule

Fuses UsageBlank Not UsedBlank Not UsedBlank Not UsedACCY

PWR BUS Interior Lamps

DR/ LCK Door LocksBlank Not Used

R/LAMPS Taillamps, License Plate LampsBlank Not Used

CRUISE Cruise ControlBlank Not Used

CLSTR Instrument Panel ClusterLTR Cigarette Lighter

STOP LAMPS StoplampsONSTAR OnStar®

PRK/LGHT Parking LampsBlank Not Used

CRNK SIG,BCM, CLSTR

Crank Signal, Body Control Module,Cluster, Powertrain Control Module

HVAC Ignition Signal, Heating, Ventilation,and Air Conditioning Control Head

BTSI (REGAL) Not UsedAIR BAG Air Bag

BCM PWR Body Control Module

5-99

Fuses UsageHAZRD Hazard Warning Flashers

LH HTD SEAT Not UsedBlank Not Used

BCM ACCY Ignition Signal: Hot in ACCESSORYand RUN, Body Control Module

Blank Not UsedLOW BLWER Low Blower

ABS Anti-Lock BrakesTRN SIG Turn Signals, Cornering LampsRADIO,

HVAC, RFA,CLSTR ALDL

Radio, Heating Ventilation and AirConditioning Head; Remote KeylessEntry, Cluster

HI BLWR High BlowerRH HTD SEAT Not Used

STR/WHLCNTRL Audio Steering Wheel Controls

WPR Windshield Wipers

Underhood Fuse BlockSome fuses and relays are located in the underhoodfuse block on the passenger’s side of the vehicle in theengine compartment. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-100

Fuses Usage

1 Anti-Lock Brake System

2 Starter Solenoid

3 Power Seat, Rear Window Defogger

4High Blower, Hazard Flasher,Stoplamps, Power Mirror,Door Locks

5

Ignition Switch, Stoplamps,Anti-Lock Brake System, TurnSignals, Cluster, Air Bag, DaytimeRunning Lamps Module

6 Cooling Fan

7

Retained Accessory Power, RemoteKeyless Entry, Data Link, Heating,Ventilation, and Air ConditioningHead; Cluster, Radio, CigaretteLighter

8

Ignition Switch, Wipers, AutdioSteering Wheel Controls, BodyControl Module, Power Windows,Sunroof, Heating, Ventilation, andAir Conditioning Controls; DaytimeRunning Lamps, Rear WindowDefogger Relay

Relays Usage

9 Cooling Fan 2

10 Cooling Fan 3

11 Starter Solenoid

12 Cooling Fan 1

13 Ignition Main

14 Air Pump (Optional)

15 Not Used

16 Horn

17 Fog Lamps

18 Not Used

19 Fuel Pump

5-101

Fuses Usage

20 Not Used

21 Generator

22 Engine Control Module

23 Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch

24 Cooling Fan

25 Electronic Ignition

26 Transaxle

27 Horn

28 Fuel Injector

29 Oxygen Sensor

30 Engine Emissions

31 Fog Lamps

32 Right Headlamp

Fuses Usage

33 Rear Compartment Release

34 Parking Lamps

35 Fuel Pump

36 Left Headlamp

37 Not Used

38 Not Used

39 Not Used

40 Not Used

41 Not Used

42 Not Used

43 Not Used

SYMBOL Air Conditioner CompressorClutch Diode

5-102

Capacities and Specifications

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 2.4 lbs 1.1 kg

Automatic TransaxlePan Removal and ReplacementAfter Complete OverhaulWhen draining/replacing converter, more fluid will beneeded.

7.4 quarts10.0 quarts

7.0 L9.5 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir 11.7 quarts 11.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.0 quarts 3.8 L

Fuel Tank 17.0 gallons 64.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Displacement Firing Order

3100 V6 J1 Automatic 191 CID 1–2–3–4–5–6

5-103

✍ NOTES

5-104

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive long distances all the time in very hot, dustyweather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in manyother ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench dealer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-34.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-4.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

If you want to get service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you whatshould be checked, when to check it and what youcan easily do to help keep your vehicle in goodcondition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the engine oillife system may not indicate that vehicle serviceis necessary for over a year. However, your engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicianswho will perform this work using genuine GM partsand reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-13 for information on the EngineOil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON light appears,certain services, checks and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,it is recommended that your first service beMaintenance I, your second service be Maintenance IIand that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light comeson within ten months since vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the light comes on ten monthsor more since the last service or if the light has notcome on at all for one year.

6-4

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-13. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †. • •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-57. • •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Service 25,000(41 500)

50,000(83 000)

75,000(125 000)

100,000(166 000)

125,000(207 500)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.An Emission Control Service.

• • • • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every 5 years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. •

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuineGM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,a pressure test of the cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of the radiator andair conditioning condenser is recommended at leastonce a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hingesand latches, including those for the body doors,hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, releasepawl, rear compartment, glove box door and consoledoor. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better and not stick orsqueak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, thefilter may require replacement more often.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See EngineCoolant on page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace parts asneeded. Replace any components that have high effortor excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator orcruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist youwith these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.

6-8

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-22 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to checkyour spare tire. See Tires on page 5-57 for furtherdetails.

Cassette Tape Player ServiceClean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be doneevery 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)on page 3-44 for further details.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-25 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench dealer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-25 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUNposition, but don’t start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), contact your GMGoodwrench dealer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The key should turn to LOCK only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.

6-10

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by theparking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).Then release the parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-13.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-22.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

6-12

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsPart GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 24508572 A1614C

Engine Oil Filter 25010792 PF-47

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 10406026 —

Spark PlugsGap

12568387.060 inches (56.0 cm)

41–101.060 inches (56.0 cm)

Windshield Wiper Blades 22143943 —

Type Shepherd’s Hook Style

Length 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6-14

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-16

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Program for Persons

with Disabilities ...........................................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-6Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Records .....................................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operation of your vehiclewill be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.)

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Buick, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. You can find your specific vehicle informationall in one place.

The Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual. (United States only)

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members. (United States only)

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Buick has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesBuick encourages customers to call the toll-free numberfor assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write toBuick, the letter should be addressed to Buick’sCustomer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer AssistanceBuick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-4

GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities

This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver orpassenger adaptiveequipment you mayrequire for your vehicle(hand controls,wheelchair/scooterlifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The offer is available fora limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. For more details, or to determine yourvehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call theGM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramBuick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick PremiumRoadside Assistance to customers for vehicles coveredunder the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) new carwarranty (whichever occurs first).

Our commitment to Buick owners has always includedsuperior service through our network of Buick dealers.Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides anextra measure of convenience and security.

Buick’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffedby a team of technically trained advisors, who areavailable 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providingminor repair information over the phone or makingarrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Buickdealer.

We will provide the following services for3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:

• Fuel delivery

• Lock-out service (identification required)

• Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service

• Change a flat tire

• Jump starts

7-5

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbersof the following additional services depending onyour needs:

• Hotels

• Glass replacement

• Tire repair facilities

• Rental vehicle or taxis

• Airports or train stations

• Police, fire department or hospitals

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Buick’s comprehensive warranty. However, whenother services are utilized, our advisors will explainany payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following information to give the advisor:

• Location of vehicle

• Telephone number of your location

• Vehicle model, year and color

• Mileage of vehicle

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle license plate number

Buick reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick’sjudgement, the claims become excessive in frequency ortype of occurrence.While we hope you never have the occasion to use ourservice, it is added security while traveling for youand your family. Remember, we’re only a phone callaway. Buick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112,text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveRoadside Assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy TransportationBuick has always exemplified quality and value in itsoffering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participating dealers areproud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

7-6

Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helpsminimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes a oneway or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to10 miles from the dealership.

7-7

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement (five days maximum) may be availablefor the use of public transportation such a s taxi orbus. In addition, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may beavailable. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs andbe supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicleyou obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30 aday and must be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement and meetstate, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Youare responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessivemileage or rental usage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

7-8

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordsYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Some informationmay be stored during regular operations to facilitaterepair of detected malfunctions; other informationis stored only in a crash or near crash event bycomputer systems commonly called event datarecorders (EDR).

In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, suchas the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated, suchas engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,vehicle speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance data, and the severity of a collision. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety.

Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, theseon-board systems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.GM will not access information about a crash event orshare it with others other than

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research where appropriateconfidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations for researchpurposes.

7-9

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or SDM.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please checkthe OnStar subscription service agreement or manual forinformation on its operations and data collection.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

7-10

Reporting Safety Defects to GeneralMotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.

Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.


7-11

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.


Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.


Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-37Additional Program Information ........................... 7-8Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-97Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-48, 3-55Air Bag

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-30Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-49

How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-55Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-58What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-55What Will You See After an Air Bag

Inflates? .................................................. 1-56When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-54Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-52

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9AM ............................................................... 3-63Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-64Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-6Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............... 3-33

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-88Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-91Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-94Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-88Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-91Finish Damage ............................................ 5-93Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-93Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-94Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-95Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-17Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-44

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-62Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-63Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-64Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-64Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-64Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-53Radio with CD ............................................ 3-45Setting the Time .......................................... 3-45Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-62Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-63

Automatic Operation ........................................ 3-21Automatic Transaxle

Fluid .......................................................... 5-19Operation ................................................... 2-22

1

BBacking Up .................................................... 4-43Battery .......................................................... 5-41Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-9Battery Rundown Protection ............................. 3-16Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22Brake

Parking ...................................................... 2-25System Warning Light .................................. 3-32

Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-38Brake Wear ................................................... 5-40Brakes .......................................................... 5-38Braking ........................................................... 4-6Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-51

Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-55Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-53Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-52Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-51Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-49Headlamps ................................................. 5-51Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-55Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-54

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-69

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-5Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCanadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-6Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-26, 4-39, 2-13, 2-29Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-91Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-63Your CD Player ........................................... 3-64Your CDs ................................................... 3-64

Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-59Cassette Tape Player Service ............................. 6-9CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-59CD Messages ........................................ 3-52, 3-61Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-35Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-53Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-20Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-73Charging System Light .................................... 3-31Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-36Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-23Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-13

2

Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-58Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-94Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-34Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-30Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-40Older Children ............................................. 1-28Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-42Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 1-44Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside

Seat Position ........................................... 1-42Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-47Top Strap ................................................... 1-38Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-39Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-37

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-17Cleaning

Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-88Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-91Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-94Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-93

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-92Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-88Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-90Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-90Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-90Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-90Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-93Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-90Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-92Climate Control System

Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-26Dual .......................................................... 3-18Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-21Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-25

Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-87Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Convenience Net ............................................ 2-35Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-35Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21

Cooling System .............................................. 5-28Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-15Cruise Control .................................................. 3-8Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-42Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12

3

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation .................................. 7-6Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ....................................................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ................................................ 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ............................................ 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp

System ...................................................... 3-13Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-20, 3-24Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-15Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-16Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-14Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-7Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-33

Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-33Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16Door

Locks ........................................................ 2-10Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11Trunk Ajar Warning Light .............................. 3-42

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-16City ........................................................... 4-20Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-21Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17Winter ........................................................ 4-26

Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-44Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-27Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-19Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-19Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-42Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-21Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-18

4

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-97Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-97Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-97Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-97Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-97

Emergency Trunk Release Handle ..................... 2-14Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

Programs ................................................... 3-39Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18Battery ....................................................... 5-41Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-41Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-36Coolant ...................................................... 5-22Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-21Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-35Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-29Oil ............................................................. 5-13Overheating ................................................ 5-25Starting ...................................................... 2-20

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-45Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-9Warning Light ............................................. 3-34

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-15Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9Express-Down Window .................................... 2-16Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-27Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ....... 3-49, 3-56Finding a Station .................................... 3-46, 3-53Finish Care .................................................... 5-92Finish Damage ............................................... 5-93Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-64Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-6Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-74Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-75Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-19Power Steering ........................................... 5-35Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36

FM ............................................................... 3-63Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-5Following Distance .......................................... 4-43

5

Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-34Fuel ............................................................... 5-4

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-5Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6Gage ......................................................... 3-43Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-44

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-97Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-97

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35Fuel .......................................................... 3-43Speedometer .............................................. 3-29

GasolineOctane ........................................................ 5-4Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-34GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities .................................................... 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-49Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-6Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-97Headlamps .................................................... 5-51

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-51Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-52Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-51

Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24Hitches .......................................................... 4-42Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-10

Horn ............................................................... 3-5How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-30How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-32How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-21How to Check ........................................ 5-20, 5-65How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-36How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-19

6

IIf No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-27If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-26If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-37If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-38If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-28If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-40Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19Illumination on Remote Activation ........................ 2-8Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-30Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-64Instrument Panel

Cluster ....................................................... 3-28Overview ..................................................... 3-2

Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-98Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-42

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLamps

Exterior ...................................................... 3-12Interior ....................................................... 3-15

Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-20Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-12, 1-22LATCH System

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-40Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-42Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-12Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine

Running ..................................................... 2-27Light

Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-30Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-33Brake System Warning ................................. 3-32Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-41Charging System ......................................... 3-31Cruise Control ............................................. 3-42Door/Trunk Ajar Warning ............................... 3-42Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-35Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light .......................................... 3-34Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-44Low Traction ............................................... 3-34Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-42

7

Light (cont.)Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-36Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-40Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-30Security ..................................................... 3-41Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-42Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-36

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-17Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-34Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12Locks

Door .......................................................... 2-10Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-12Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12Power Door ................................................ 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-44Low Traction Light .......................................... 3-34Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-42

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using Your ................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-45Making Turns ................................................. 4-43Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-36Manual Operation ................................... 3-18, 3-22Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-8Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/

Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-4

8

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-31Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-31Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-32Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-32

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

NNew Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-29Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12Oil

Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-41Engine ....................................................... 5-13Pressure Light ............................................. 3-40

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-34OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-33OnStar® System ............................................. 2-33OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-34Operation Tips ................................................ 3-26Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4

Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-25Outside

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-32Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-32

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode .......................................... 5-25

Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-4Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... iiOwner’s Information ........................................ 7-12

PPark (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-26Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-28

ParkingBrake ........................................................ 2-25Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-29

Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-44Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-26Passenger Control .......................................... 3-24Passing ................................................. 4-13, 4-43PASS-Key® II ................................................. 2-17Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-58Playing a CD ......................................... 3-51, 3-60Playing the Radio ................................... 3-45, 3-53

9

PowerAccessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17Door Locks ................................................. 2-11Electrical System ......................................... 5-97Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-3Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35Windows .................................................... 2-16

Power Steering ............................................... 4-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-10

RRadiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-25Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-48, 3-55Radio Messages ..................................... 3-51, 3-58Radios .......................................................... 3-44

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-63Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-64Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-64Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-53Radio with CD ............................................ 3-45Setting the Time .......................................... 3-45Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-62Understanding Reception .............................. 3-63

RDS Messages ...................................... 3-50, 3-57Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-16Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-25Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-22Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-20, 3-25Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-31Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-31Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ............. 2-5Remote Trunk Release .................................... 2-13Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-79Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-76Removing the Wheel Center Caps .................... 5-78Removing the Wheel Covers ............................ 5-78Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-55Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-41Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ..................................................... 1-59Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-10General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System CheckChecking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-58

10

Restraint System Check (cont.)Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash ..................................................... 1-59Restraint Systems

Checking .................................................... 1-58Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-59

Resynchronization ............................................. 2-9Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-20Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-30

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-30Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-91Center Passenger Position ............................ 1-20Driver Position ............................................ 1-12How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-10Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults ...................................... 1-25Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-22Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-20

Safety Belts (cont.)Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-27Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-19Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6

Safety Chains ................................................. 4-42Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5Manual ........................................................ 1-2Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3Six-Way Power Seats .................................... 1-3Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-5

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-44Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-42Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-42Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-47

Security Feedback ............................................ 2-6Security Light ................................................. 3-41Sensors ......................................................... 3-24Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of YourVehicle ..................................................... 5-4

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-36Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-42

Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12Service Engine Soon Light ............................... 3-36

11

Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-47, 3-54Setting the Time ............................................. 3-45Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-47, 3-54Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-93Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-26Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-28Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-14Skidding ........................................................ 4-15Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-19Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-89Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-103Speedometer .................................................. 3-29Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-5Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20Steering ........................................................ 4-10Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-62Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-35Convenience Net ......................................... 2-35Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-34Glove Box .................................................. 2-34

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-85Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-86Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17Sunroof ......................................................... 2-36

TTaillamps

Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-54Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-62Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17

PASS-Key® II .............................................. 2-17Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-36Tire Inflation Check ........................................... 6-9Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-58Tire Size ....................................................... 5-61Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-62Tires ............................................................. 5-57

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-69Chains ....................................................... 5-73Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-75Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-87If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-74Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-64Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-67Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-65Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-70Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-71Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-72When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-68

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-21Top Strap ...................................................... 1-38

12

Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-39Torque Lock ................................................... 2-28Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-42Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-39Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-31

TractionEnhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-9Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light .......................................... 3-34Low Light ................................................... 3-34

Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-42Transaxle

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-22Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit

Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11Transportation Options ...................................... 7-7Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-29Trunk ............................................................ 2-13Trunk Assist Handle ........................................ 2-14Trunk Lock .................................................... 2-13Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-44

UUnderhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-100Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-63Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-70United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-73Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-89

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-34Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-42Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Records ............................................... 7-9

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-96Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-96

Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-41Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-25Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-17Visors ........................................................... 2-17

13

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-27Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-42Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-91Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-40Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-41What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17What to Use .......................................... 5-22, 5-36Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-71Replacement ............................................... 5-72

When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14When to Change Engine Oil

(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-16

When to Check .............................................. 5-65When to Check and Change ............................ 5-19When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-36When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking

on a Hill ..................................................... 4-45Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-37Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-7Window Lock-Out ............................................ 2-16Windows ....................................................... 2-15

Power ........................................................ 2-16Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-8

Fluid .......................................................... 5-36Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-56Fuses ........................................................ 5-97

Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

2004 Buick Century Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · appears in this manual. Please keep this manual...

Documents

Transcript of 2004 Buick Century Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · appears in this manual. Please keep this manual...